AQUASNAP®30RAP010-060 Air-Cooled Chillers with COMFORTLINK™ Controls Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Troubleshooting CONTENTS Page SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Basic Controls Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-44 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Current Sensor Board (CSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 AUX Board (AUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Expansion Valve Board (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . . .19 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 • COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR • COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR • COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR • OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) • DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (DTT) • REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR Energy Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 • MINUTES LEFT FOR START • MINUTES OFF TIME • LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION • CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Operation of Machine Based on Control Method and Cooling Set Point Selection Settings . . . . . . . . .32 Cooling Set Point Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Low Sound Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Heating Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Package . . . . . . .34 Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control . . . .36 Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 • DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) • EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to 20 mA Controlled) • DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Digital Scroll Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 • DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION • DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,45 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 START-UP AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,46 Actual Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Check Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 • TEMPERATURES • LOW AMBIENT OPERATION • VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS Page OPERATION SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46,47 SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-63 Electronic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 • CONTROL COMPONENTS Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 EXV Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 • FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS • VALVE REPLACEMENT • VALVE REASSEMBLY Compressor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 • BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER REPLACEMENT • BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER CLEANING Oil Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Check Refrigerant Feed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 • FILTER DRIER • MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR • MINIMUM LOAD VALVE • PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES Check Unit Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 • HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH • PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS • COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION • HEATER CABLE • WINTER SHUTDOWN Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Chilled Water Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Condenser Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Motormaster® V Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 • GENERAL OPERATION • CONFIGURATION • DRIVE PROGRAMMING • EPM CHIP • LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS • REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES Hydronic Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64 Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-73 Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RAP-2T Pg 1 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine CONTENTS (cont) Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 • GENERAL POWER FAILURE • UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS OFF • CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN • OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKERS • COOLING LOAD SATISFIED • THERMISTOR FAILURE • LOW SATURATED SUCTION • COMPRESSOR SAFETIES Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74-89 APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-100 APPENDIX C — FACTORY SETTINGS FOR PUMP AND MANUAL STARTERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATONS WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102-109 APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-113 START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RAP LIQUID CHILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CL-1 to CL-10 Page WARNING DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the refrigerant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil. CAUTION This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out components, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or electrical components. CAUTION To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler fluid loop to prevent the freezing of brazed plate heat exchanger, optional hydronic section and/or interconnecting piping when the equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32 F (0 °C). Proof of flow switch and strainer are factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power from this chiller during winter shutdown periods without taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchanger and optional hydronic system. Failure to properly protect the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may void warranty. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and equipment location (roof, elevated structures, mechanical rooms, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service mechanics should install, start up, and service this equipment. When working on this equipment, observe precautions in the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in handling all electrical components. WARNING Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed. CAUTION Compressors and optional hydronic system pumps require specific rotation. Test condenser fan(s) first to ensure proper phasing. Swap any two incoming power leads to correct condenser fan rotation before starting any other motors. WARNING DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building. Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous. CAUTION Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure. CAUTION Puron® refrigerant (R-410A) systems operate at higher pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment. If service equipment is not rated for Puron refrigerant, equipment damage or personal injury may result. 2 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine GENERAL This publication contains Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service, and Troubleshooting information for the 30RAP AquaSnap® air-cooled chillers. See Table 1. These chillers are equipped with ComfortLink™ controls and electronic expansion valves (EXVs). WARNING This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out or bypass components or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the board or electrical component. Table 1 — Unit Sizes UNIT 30RAP010 30RAP015 30RAP018 30RAP020 30RAP025 30RAP030 30RAP035 30RAP040 30RAP045 30RAP050 30RAP055 30RAP060 NOMINAL CAPACITY (TONS) 10 14 16 19 24 28 34 39 43 48 53 56 Control System for 30RAP units. The display has up and down arrow keys, an ENTER key, and an ESCAPE key. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. Press the ESCAPE key until the highest operating level is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 1 and Tables 2-14. Once within a mode or sub-mode, pressing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys simultaneously will put the scrolling marquee display into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed for the current selection. Press the ENTER and ESCAPE keys to return the scrolling marquee display to its default menu of rotating display items (those items in Run StatusVIEW). In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made to password protected items. Press the ESCAPE key to exit out of the expanded text mode. NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display expansions will immediately change to the new language. No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages. When a specific item is located, the item name alternates with the value. Press the ENTER key at a changeable item and the value will be displayed. Press ENTER again and the value will begin to flash indicating that the value can be changed. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value, and confirm the value by pressing the ENTER key. Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow- ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory) will be used in this manual. Point names will be written with the mode name first, then any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an arrow symbol (. Names will also be shown in bold and italics. As an example, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point, which is located in the Configuration mode, Option sub-mode, would be written as Configuration OPTNLLCS. This path name will show the user how to navigate through the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the and keys. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing ENTER to move into the next level of the menu structure. When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example, ConfigurationOPTNLLCS = 1 (Circuit A leads). Pressing the ESCAPE and ENTER keys simultaneously will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or value across the display. The expanded description is shown in the local display tables but will not be shown with the path names in text. MODE Run Status Service Test Temperature Pressures Setpoints Inputs Outputs Configuration Time Clock Operating Modes Alarms Alarm Status ESCAPE ENTER Fig. 1 — Scrolling Marquee Display Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press ENTER so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state and press the ENTER key to accept it. Press the ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of structure. Repeat the process as required for other items. Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The words ‘PASS’ and ‘WORD’ will alternate on the display when required. The default password is 0111. Press ENTER and the 1111 password will be displayed. Press ENTER again and the first digit will begin to flash. Use the arrow keys to change the number and press ENTER to accept the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password. The password can only be changed through CCN operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS®, ComfortVIEW™ and Service Tool. See Tables 2-14 and Appendix A for further details. 3 The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) point names are also referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the unit with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN tables are located in Appendix B of the manual. Basic Controls Usage SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — The scrolling marquee display is the standard interface display to the ComfortLink Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine Press the ENTER key at a changeable item and the value will begin to flash. press the ESCAPE key until the display reads. Press ENTER to accept the change.” Using the arrow keys move to the Configuration mode. Pressing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys when the display says ‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items in Run StatusVIEW). To adjust the contrast of the Navigator module. The factory default is set to the highest level. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state and press the ENTER key to accept it. Use the up or down arrows to adjust the contrast. ComfortVIEW and Service Tool. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus. Use the arrow keys to change the number and press ENTER to enter the digit. Adjusting the Backlight Brightness — The backlight of the display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. the item name appears on the left of the display. The password can only be changed through CCN operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS. requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made to password protected items. variable is changed. Pressing ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON”. No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages. Use the up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press ENTER to accept the change. 2 — Accessory Navigator™ Display Module 4 Downloaded from www. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value. an ENTER key. and an ESCAPE key. The default password is 1111. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus. Press the ESCAPE key to return to the next higher level of structure. Pressing ENTER will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen.Manualslib. Press ENTER to obtain access to this mode. a “>” indicates the currently selected item on the display screen.ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE — The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the ComfortLink™ control system. Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. with 1111 also being displayed. Repeat the process as required for other items. Once within a Mode or sub-mode.” Using the arrow keys move to the Configuration mode. the value will appear near the middle of the display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the display. Continue with the remaining digits of the password. Pressing ENTER will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Press the ESCAPE key until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. Com fortL ink MOD Run E Alarm Status Status Servic e Tes t Tem peratu res Pressu res Setpo ints Inputs Outpu ts Config uration Time Clock Opera ting Modes Alarm s ESC ENTE R Fig. NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration DISPLANG). In addition. which is only available as a field-installed accessory. “Select a menu item. When a specific item is located. items and their values can be displayed. The display will read: > TEST OFF METR OFF LANG ENGLISH Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. “Select a menu item. Pressing the ENTER and ESCAPE keys simultaneously will put the Navigator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes. Use the up or down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON”. The screen’s contrast will change with the adjustment. and confirm the value by pressing the ENTER key.com manuals search engine . The display has up and down arrow keys. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. Press the ESCAPE key to exit out of the expanded text mode. Press ENTER so that the item value flashes. press the ESCAPE key until the display reads. Adjusting the Contrast — The contrast of the display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. Press ENTER to obtain access to this mode. Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. all appropriate display expansions will immediately change to the new language. The display will read: > TEST OFF METR OFF LANG ENGLISH Pressing ENTER will cause the “OFF” to flash. To adjust the backlight of the Navigator module. 2. See Fig. The words Enter Password will be displayed when required. the password will be disabled. Locate and display the desired item. A EXV Configuration (EXV.A) Cir.B) Motormaster Configuration (MM) Reset Cool Temp (RSET) Set Point and Ramp Load (SLCT) Service Configuration (SERV) Broadcast Configuration (BCST) TIME CLOCK Time of Day (TIME) Month.A) Pressures Ckt B (PRC.B) Cir.B) CONFIGURATION Display Configuration (DISP) Unit Configuration (UNIT) Unit Options 1 Hardware (OPT1) Unit Options 2 Controls (OPT2) CCN Network Configuration (CCN) Head Pressure Comp.EXV) Outputs Circuit A (CIR.Manualslib.Table 2 — Scrolling Marquee Display Menu Structure* MODE RUN STATUS Auto View of Run Status (VIEW) Unit Run Hour and Start (RUN) SERVICE TEST Service Test Mode (TEST) Outputs and Pumps (OUTS) TEMPERATURES PRESSURES Ent and Leave Unit Temps (UNIT) Temperatures Ckt A (CIR.O) Outputs Circuit A EXV (A.I) Circuit Inputs (CRCT) 4-20mA Inputs (4-20) OUTPUTS General Outputs (GEN.L) Local Occupancy Schedule (SCH.A) Outputs Circuit B (CIR. Delta (HP. and Year (DATE) Daylight Savings Time (DST) Local Holiday Schedules (HOL. B EXV Configuration (EXV. Day.A) Head Pressure Comp.com manuals search engine .B) SET POINTS Cooling Setpoints (COOL) Head Pressure Setpoint (HEAD) Brine Freeze Setpoint (FRZ) INPUTS General Inputs (GEN.EXV) Outputs Circuit B EXV (B.A) Temperatures Ckt B (CIR. Delta (HP. Date. using the language selection item: Language Selection (ConfigurationDISPLANG) 5 Downloaded from www.L) Schedule Override (OVR) OPERATING MODES Modes (MODE) ALARMS Current (CRNT) Reset Alarms (RCRN) Alarm History (HIST) Compressor Ciruit A Comp Run Hours Test (HOUR) (CMPA) Compressor Ciruit B Comp Starts Test (STRT) (CMPB) Preventive Maintenance (PM) Software Version (VERS) SUB-MODE LEGEND Ckt — Circuit *Throughout this text.B) Pressures Ckt A (PRC. the location of items in the menu structure will be described in the following format: Item Expansion (Mode NameSub-mode NameITEM) For example. U HR.X HOUR ENTER HRS.2.X F XXX X SUB-ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTERING FLUID TEMP LEAVING FLUID TEMP ACTIVE SETPOINT CONTROL POINT LOAD/UNLOAD FACTOR CONTROL MODE COMMENT 0 = Service Test 1 = Off Local 2 = Off CCN 3 = Off Time 4 = Off Emrgcy 5 = On Local 6 = On CCN 7 = On Time 8 = Ht Enabled 9 = Pump Delay LD.Manualslib.B1 XXXX HRS HR.XX XX XX XX OCCUPIED LOW SOUND ACTIVE OVERRIDE MODES IN EFFECT PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY REQUESTED STAGE CURRENT ALARMS & ALERTS TIME OF DAY MONTH OF YEAR DAY OF MONTH YEAR OF CENTURY MACHINE OPERATING HOURS MACHINE STARTS PUMP 1 RUN HOURS PUMP 2 RUN HOURS CIRCUIT A RUN HOURS CIRCUIT B RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR A1 RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR A2 RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR B1 RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR B2 RUN HOURS COMPRESSOR A1 STARTS COMPRESSOR A2 STARTS COMPRESSOR B1 STARTS COMPRESSOR B2 STARTS PUMP MAINTENANCE SI.PM P.com manuals search engine .X XXXX.Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE VIEW KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM EWT LWT SETP CTPT LOD. 2 = February.1.P2 XXXX XXXX.A2 ST. 6 Downloaded from www.59 1 = January.X F XXX.DN P.U XXXX HRS STR. except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.X F XXX.PM OCC LS. the Circuit B items will not appear in the display. 01-31 HRS.B2 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX PM ENTER PUMP ENTER NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit.A1 XXXX HRS HR.MN XXXX HRS XXXX HRS XXXX HRS YES/NO YES/NO PUMP SERVICE INTERVAL PUMP 1 SERVICE COUNTDOWN PUMP 2 SERVICE COUNTDOWN PUMP 1 MAINTENANCE DONE PUMP 2 MAINTENANCE DONE User Entry User Entry Default: 8760 See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note 00.AC MODE CAP STGE ALRM TIME MNTH DATE YEAR RUN ENTER LEAD PUMP YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO XXX % X XXX XX.DN P.1.X F XXX.P1 HR.B1 ST.F STAT DISPLAY XXX.00-23.B2 XXXX HRS STRT ENTER ST.A XXXX HRS HRS.MN P.A2 XXXX HRS HR.B XXXX HRS HR.2.A1 ST. etc. T.Manualslib.M1 C.M3 P.2.1.L.1.M1 S.2.com manuals search engine .M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM CESR131460-xx-xx CESR131172-xx-xx CESR131333-xx-xx CESR131174-xx-xx CESR131171-xx-xx CESR130227-xx-xx Default: 8760 User Entry ENTER VERS ENTER MBB EXV AUX1 EMM MARQ NAVI xx-xx is Version number* xx-xx is Version number* xx-xx is Version number* xx-xx is Version number* xx-xx is Version number* xx-xx is Version number* *Press ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously to obtain version number. 7 Downloaded from www.DN S.CL C.L.M3 C.DT XXXX HRS XXXX HRS YES/NO ENTER STRAINER SRVC INTERVAL STRAINER SRVC COUNTDOWN STRAINER MAINT. DATES S.Table 3 — Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE PM (cont) ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM PMDT DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES COMMENT P. DONE COIL MAINTENANCE DATES C.M2 S.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM COIL MAINTENANCE Default: 8760 User Entry ENTER ENTER COIL SI.1.M2 P.L.L.DN C.ST S.M3 S.M1 P.L.T.M2 P.2.L.T.1.M0 P.M4 MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM STRAINER MAINTENANCE ENTER STRN SI.M0 S.T.DT XXXX HRS XXXX HRS YES/NO ENTER COIL SRVC INTER COIL SERVICE COUNTDOWN COIL MAINT.2.M2 C.L. DONE STRAINER MAINT.2.T.M3 P.MN CL.M0 P.T.T.1.M0 C.MN ST.M4 P.M1 P. 1 CLP. the Circuit B items will not appear in the display.TM CL.A1 UL.HT RMT.Manualslib.A 0 to 100% 0 to 100% ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 0 to 100% 0 to 100% ON/OFF ON/OFF 0 to 15 ON/OFF ON/OFF EXV A % OPEN EXV B % OPEN FAN 1 RELAY FAN 2 RELAY FAN 3 RELAY FAN 4 RELAY FAN 5 RELAY FAN 6 RELAY VAR HEAD PRESS % VAR HEAD PRESS % COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME COOLER/PUMP HEATER REMOTE ALARM RELAY CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST ENTER CMPA CC.A2 CC.A3 CC. Move switch to ENABLE.Table 4 — Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE TEST KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM DISPLAY ON/OFF ITEM EXPANSION SERVICE TEST MODE COMMENT To Enable Service Test Mode.B2 CC.A4 MLV CMPB ENTER ON/OFF 0 to 15 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY COMP A1 UNLOAD TIME COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST See Note CC.B4 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit. except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed. move Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to OFF.B3 CC.HPB CLP. OUTS ENTER OUTPUTS AND PUMPS EXV.A EXV.2 UL.B1 CC. Change TEST to ON. 8 Downloaded from www.HPA V.com manuals search engine .TM CC.B FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 V. Manualslib.X PSIG PRC. the Circuit B items will not appear in the display.A D.X PSIG XXX.X F XXX.ON F.B XXX.2 CSP.X F XXX.B RGT.OFF F.B ENTER See Note See Note See Note DP. except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.X F XXX.A SST.com manuals search engine .DP F.X F XXX.B SH.B SP.X F XXX.X F XXX.X F XXX.X ^F SATURATED CONDENSING TMP SATURATED SUCTION TEMP COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit.Table 5 — Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE UNIT ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY XXX.X F XXX.X F XXX.B SST.X F ITEM EXPANSION ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMPS COOLER ENTERING FLUID COOLER LEAVING FLUID OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SPACE TEMPERATURE LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A COMMENT CEWT CLWT OAT SPT DLWT CIR.B XXX. Table 6 — Pressure Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE PRC.X F ITEM EXPANSION COOLING SETPOINTS COOLING SETPOINT 1 COOLING SETPOINT 2 ICE SETPOINT HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS COMMENT CSP.GAS SH. the Circuit B items will not appear in the display.A XXX.X F XXX.X F XXX.B ENTER SCT.A ENTER SCT.X F XXX.X F XXX.X F XXX. Table 7 — Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE COOL ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY XXX.A ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION PRESSURES CIRCUIT A DISCHARGE PRESSURE SUCTION PRESSURE PRESSURES CIRCUIT B COMMENT DP.DLT XXX.X F XXX.3 Default: 44 F Default: 44 F Default: 32 F HEAD ENTER H.X F HEAD SETPOINT FAN ON SETPOINT FAN OFF SETPOINT BASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP FAN STAGE DELTA BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT Default: 95 F Default: 95 F Default: 72 F Default: 23 F Default: 15 F FRZ ENTER BR. except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.A RGT.X ^F SATURATED CONDENSING TMP SATURATED SUCTION TEMP COMPR RETURN GAS TEMP DISCHARGE GAS TEMP SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note CIR.X PSIG XXX.X F BRINE FREEZE POINT Default: 34 F 9 Downloaded from www.FZ XXX.X F XXX.1 CSP.A SP.X PSIG DISCHARGE PRESSURE SUCTION PRESSURE NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit.X F XXX.A XXX.OFF B. HPA V.2 HT.Manualslib.WP2 CLHT MLV.F.X MA XX.O ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION GENERAL OUTPUTS FAN 1 RELAY FAN 2 RELAY FAN 3 RELAY FAN 4 RELAY FAN 5 RELAY FAN 6 RELAY FAN SPEED CIRCUIT A FAN SPEED CIRCUIT B COOLER PUMP RELAY 1 COOLER PUMP RELAY 2 COOLER/PUMP HEATER MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY COMMENT FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 V.R ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 10 Downloaded from www.RQ DLS1 DLS2 ICED DUAL STRT/STOP ON/OFF OPEN/CLSE OPEN/CLSE ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF CRCT ENTER FKA1 FKA2 FKA3 FKA4 FKB1 FKB2 FKB3 FKB4 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR A2 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR A3 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR A4 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR B1 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR B2 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR B3 FEEDBACK COMPRESSOR B4 FEEDBACK 4-20 MA INPUTS See Note See Note See Note See Note 4-20 ENTER DMND RSET CSP XX.com manuals search engine . Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE GEN. the Circuit B items will not appear in the display.I ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION GENERAL INPUTS START/STOP SWITCH COOLER FLOW SWITCH COOLER PUMP 1 INTERLOCK COOLER PUMP 2 INTERLOCK HEAT REQUEST DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1 DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2 ICE DONE DUAL SETPOINT SWITCH CIRCUITS INPUTS COMMENT STST FLOW PM.WP1 C.F.X MA XX.1 PM.X MA 4-20 MA DEMAND SIGNAL 4-20 MA RESET SIGNAL 4-20 MA COOLING SETPOINT NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit.HPB C. except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.Table 8 — Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE GEN. A APPR AP.A ASH.SH.R SH_R OVR.B APPR AP.B3 CC.B ENTER CC. the Circuit B items will not appear in the display.B SPH.S AMP.SP X. On = Metric Default: 0 0 = English 1 = Espanol 2 = Francais 3 = Portuguese PAS.Table 9 — Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE A.1 0 to 100% ON/OFF B.SH.Manualslib.B2 CC. Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE DISP ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION DISPLAY CONFIGURATION TEST DISPLAY LEDS METRIC DISPLAY LANGUAGE SELECTION COMMENT TEST METR LANG ON/OFF ON/OFF X Off = English.com manuals search engine .A1 DPE.SP OVR.EXV ENTER EXV.A SPR.B ASH.E PASS ENBL/DSBL xxxx PASSWORD ENABLE SERVICE PASSWORD Default: Enable Default: 1111 NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit.A ENTER CC.A4 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY COMP A1 LOAD PERCENT COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B (See Note) CIR.R CC.EXV ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV EXV % OPEN CIRCUIT A APPROACH APPROACH SETPOINT SH RESET AT MAX UNL-DIG DIGLOAD TO START SH RST AMOUNT OF SH RESET EXVA OVERRIDE SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT ACTIVE MOP SETPT CIR A EXV POSITION LIMIT SPARE 1 TEMPERATURE OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B EXV COMMENT EXV.A SPH.R S.S AMP.S PLM.B SPR.B1 CC.2 0 to 100% ON/OFF EXV % OPEN CIRCUIT B APPROACH APPROACH SETPOINT EXVB OVERRIDE SUCTION SUPERHEAT TEMP ACTIVE SUPERHEAT SETPT ACTIVE MOP SETPT CIR B EXV POSITION LIMIT SPARE 2 TEMPERATURE OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A CIR. the Circuit B items will not appear in the display.S PLM. 11 Downloaded from www.B4 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit.A3 CC.A2 CC. except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed. except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed. DY PM.Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE UNIT KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION UNIT CONFIGURATION COMMENT SIZE SZA.Manualslib.015 Max 10 018-060 EXV YES/NO EXV MODULE INSTALLED? A1. Default: 500 hours User Entry Default: Off Default: Water 1 = Water 2 = Medium Temperature Brine Default: No PM.3 SZB.S PM.0 12 Downloaded from www.3 SZA.SL X YES/NO ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ON/OFF YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO X COOLER FLUID MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE CSB BOARDS ENABLE COOLER PUMP CONTROL COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT COOLER PUMP SELECT Default: No Default: Automatic 0 = Automatic 1 = Pump 1 Starts first 2 = Pump 2 Starts first 0 to 10 minutes.1 XX XX COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW EMM MODULE INSTALLED COND HX EXV MOP SET POINT CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT 0 = RTPF 1 = MCHX Default MCHX Range: 40 .TY YES/NO COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL? MAX.P EMM CND.EN CSB.2 SZB.P.DT ROT.G. Default: 1 min.com manuals search engine .T MOPS APPR XX MIN XXXX HRS YES/NO YES/NO 0.X F UNIT SIZE COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE SUPERHEAT SETPOINT NUMBER OF FANS Unit Dependent Unit Dependent Unit Dependent Unit Dependent Unit Dependent Unit Dependent Unit Dependent Unit Dependent Default: 9 F 1 = One Fan 2 = Two Fans 3 = Three Fans 4 = Four Fans Default: Yes Default: No Yes = A1 Compressor is Digital Scroll Default: 7 Max 12 010.40 Default: 9.SP FAN.E CPC PM1E PM2E PM.4 SH.1 SZB.4 SZB.80 Default: 50 Range: 5 .T 0 to 12 MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME OPT1 ENTER UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE FLUD MLV.S D.S XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX.2 SZA.1 SZA. M LS.DT XX XX SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1 SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2 Range: 0 .B B1.50 Default: 12 Range: 0 .MD XX.Manualslib.Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE OPT2 ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY CTRL X ITEM EXPANSION UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS CONTROL METHOD COMMENT LOAD X LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT LLCS X LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT LCWT DELY ICE.ND LS.200 5 = 38.50 Default: 12 13 Downloaded from www.50 Default: 12 Range: 0 .DT XX XX SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1 SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2 HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA ENTER Range: 0 .400 LS.DT B2.LT CCN ENTER 00:00 00:00 XXX % LOW SOUND START TIME LOW SOUND END TIME LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT CCN NETWORK CONFIGURATION CCNA CCNB BAUD XXX XXX X CCN ADDRESS CCN BUS NUMBER CCN BAUD RATE HP.A ENTER HEAD PRESSURE CMP DELTA A1.50 Default: 12 HP.ST LS.com manuals search engine .DT A2.X F XX ENBL/DSBL X HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT MINUTES OFF TIME ICE MODE ENABLE LOW SOUND MODE SELECT Default: Switch 0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch 2 = Occupancy 3 = CCN Control Default: Equal 1 = Equal 2 = Staged Default: Automatic 1 = Automatic 2 = Circuit A Leads 3 = Circuit B Leads Default: 60 Range: 2 to 60 F Default: 0 Minutes Range: 0 to 15 Minutes Default: Disable Default: 0 0 = Mode Disable 1 = Fan Noise Only 2 = Fan/Compressor Noise Default: 00:00 Default: 00:00 Default: 100% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 1 Range: 1 to 239 Default: 0 Range: 0 to 239 Default: 9600 1 = 2400 2 = 4800 3 = 9600 4 = 19. 65535 Default: * Range: 0 .20 Default: 0.65535 Default: * Range: 0 .SCT X.A RNG.65535 Default: 167 0 = UNIPOLAR 1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1 Range: 50 .A START POS EXV CIRC.B START POS EXV CIRC.A MIN POSITION EXVA STEPS IN RANGE EXVA STEPS PER SECOND EXVA FAIL POSITION IN % EXVA MINIMUM STEPS EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS EXVA OVERRUN STEPS EXVA STEPPER TYPE HIGH SCT THRESHOLD OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL PRE-OPEN EXV .100 Default: 30 Range: 0 .FAN ADDING PRE-CLOSE EXV .Manualslib. default is 2500.B XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX 0.com manuals search engine .B TYP.PCT S.65535 Default: 167 0 = UNIPOLAR 1 = BIPOLAR Default: 1 MM ENTER MMR.PCT DELY XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX 0.PCT X. 14 Downloaded from www.65535 Default: 200 Range: 0 .65535 Default: 200 Range: 0 .A OVR.30 Default: 10 Range: 0 .B SPD.100 Default: 10 Range: 0 .65535 Default: * Range: 0 .FAN SUB PRE-CLOSE EXV .1 Range: -20 . and 050-060.100 Default: 8 Range: 0 .A H.30 Default: 5 Range: 0 .A POF.20 Default: 1. default is 1596.65535 Default: 0 Range: 0 .PCT M.100 Default: 5.A ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION EXV CIRC.GAN D. Sizes 025.LAG SHUT LAG START DELAY CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION COMMENT STR.PER A.0 Range: 0 .A MIN.0 Range: -20 .1 EXV CIRC.B POF.100 Default: 10 Range: 0 .GAN MIN.A MIN.100 Default: 50 Range: 0 .S YES/NO XX XX XX XXX MOTORMASTER SELECT HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN MINIMUM FAN SPEED Range: -20 .100 Default: 0 Range: 0 .65535 Default: * Range: 0 .A MAX.B OVR.20 Default: 0.B RNG.B MIN.100 Default: 10 EXV.0 * Sizes 010-020 and 035-045.B MAX.B MIN POSITION EXVB STEPS IN RANGE EXVB STEPS PER SECOND EXVB FAIL POSITION IN % EXVB MINIMUM STEPS EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS EXVB OVERRUN STEPS EXVB STEPPER TYPE MOTORMASTER CONFIGURATION Range: 0 .A TYP.65535 Default: 0 Range: 0 .B ENTER STR.Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE EXV.100 Default: 8 Range: 0 .B MIN.S P.030.A SPD.100 Default: 10 Range: 0 .1 XXX XX XX XXX XXX XXX XXX Range: 0 .140 Default: 115 Range: 0 .GAN I.100 Default: 0 Range: 0 . X RAMP LOAD SELECT COOLING RAMP LOADING SCHEDULE NUMBER DEADBAND MULTIPLIER SERVICE CONFIGURATION EN.com manuals search engine .0F Range: –30 to 30F Default: 10.0F (0.X F XXX.NO RESET TEMP RETURN .NO RT.DEGREES RESET REMOTE .F RM.0 Range: 1.X F XXX.NO RESET TEMP REMOTE .0 RL.8C) Range: 0 to 125F Default: 0.F RT.0F Range: –30 to 30F Default: 125F (51.6C) Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T Default: 0.X XX X.X F X 4-20 .DEGREES RESET RETURN .0 Default: 1 Range: 1 to 99 Default: 1.1 C) Default: None 0 = None 1 = Switch 2 = 4 to 20 mA Input 3 = CCN Loadshed Default: 100% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99 Default: 0% Range: 0 to 60% Default: 60 minutes Range: 0 to 120 minutes Default: 80% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 50% Range: 0 to 100% Default: Disable Default: Master Default: 0 Range: 0 to 239 Default: Master Leads 0 = Master Leads 1 = Slave Leads 2 = Automatic Default: 168 hours Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 5 minutes Range: 0 to 30 minutes Default: YES (CANNOT BE CHANGED) DM20 SHNM SHDL SHTM DLS1 DLS2 LLEN MSSL SLVA ENTER XXX % XXX XXX % XXX XXX % XXX % ENBL/DSBL SLVE/MAST XXX DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1 DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2 LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE MASTER/SLAVE SELECT SLAVE ADDRESS LLBL LLBD LLDY PARA SLCT ENTER X XXX XXX YES LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA LAG START DELAY PARALLEL CONFIGURATION SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD COOLING SETPOINT SELECT CLSP X Default: Single 0 = Single 1 = Dual Switch 2 = Dual CCN Occupied 3 = 4 to 20 mA Input (requires EMM) Default: Enable Default: 1.X F XX.GN SERV ENTER ENBL/DSBL X.2 to 2.B2 ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ENABLE COMPRESSOR A1 ENABLE COMPRESSOR A2 ENABLE COMPRESSOR B1 ENABLE COMPRESSOR B2 Unit dependent Unit dependent Unit dependent Unit dependent 15 Downloaded from www.X F XXX.4 to -1.X F XX.DG DMDC XX.7C) Range: 0° to 125F Default: 0.0F (5.0F Range: –30 to 30F (–34.DG RM.FULL RESET TEMP REMOTE .0 Range: 0.0 to 4.Manualslib.DG RT.S CRMP SCHD Z.FULL RESET TEMP RETURN .0C) Range: 0 to 125F COOLER T Default: 0.B1 EN.A1 EN.0F (-17.A2 EN.NO RM.X F XXX.Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE RSET ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY CRST X ITEM EXPANSION RESET COOL TEMP COOLING RESET TYPE COMMENT MA.DEGREES RESET DEMAND LIMIT SELECT Default: No Reset 0 = No Reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA Input 2 = Outdoor Air Temperature 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temperature Default: 0. MM XX. Range 1 – 12 Default: 5.1 SUN. etc) Range: 01-31 1-7 (1 = Sunday.W STR. Range 1 – 99 HOL.W STP. Range 1 – 12 Default: 1.D. etc) DST ENTER STR.M STP.com manuals search engine . 2 = February.Manualslib.1 WED.99 Default: 1.S XX X X XX XX XX XX XX MONTH WEEK DAY MINUTES TO ADD MONTH WEEK DAY MINUTES TO SUBTRACT LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES Default: 4. 2 = Monday.DATE.1 OCC.N SCH. Range 1 – 5 Default: 7. Range 1 – 5 Default: 7.L ENTER PER.1 MON.A STP.L ENTER MON DAY LEN XX XX XX XX HOLIDAY START MONTH START DAY DURATION (DAYS) SCHEDULE NUMBER LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE SCH.S.1 HOL.1 SAT. 16 Downloaded from www.BC OAT.1 UNC.1 FRI.30 Range 0 – 12 Range 0 – 31 Range 0 .BC BC.Table 10 — Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE BCST ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION BROADCAST CONFIGURATION CCN TIME/DATE BROADCAST CCN OAT BROADCAST GLOBAL SCHEDULE BROADCAST CCN BROADCAST ACK’ER COMMENT T.01 through HD.B G. Range 0 – 99 Default: 10. Range 0 – 99 HD.AK ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE TIME ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION TIME OF DAY HOUR AND MINUTE MONTH.D MIN.M STR.1 THU.1 XX:XX XX.XX Military (00:00 – 23:59) DATE ENTER MNTH DOM DAY YEAR XX XX X XXXX MONTH OF YEAR DAY OF MONTH DAY OF WEEK YEAR OF CENTURY DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME 1-12 (1 = January.XX YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1* PERIOD OCCUPIED TIME PERIOD UNOCCUPIED TIME MONDAY IN PERIOD TUESDAY IN PERIOD WEDNESDAY IN PERIOD THURSDAY IN PERIOD FRIDAY IN PERIOD SATURDAY IN PERIOD SUNDAY IN PERIOD HOLIDAY IN PERIOD Military (00:00 – 23:59) Military (00:00 – 23:59) ENTER * Repeats for Occupancy Periods 2 through 8. Range 1 – 7 Default: 60.D MIN.DAY AND YEAR COMMENT HH.1 TUE. Range 1 – 7 Default: 60. T OVR.Table 11 — Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE OVR ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY SUB-ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION SCHEDULE OVERRIDE TIMED OVERRIDE HOURS OVERRIDE TIME LIMIT TIMED OVERRIDE COMMENT OVR.OVR X X YES/NO Default: 0. Range 0-4 hours User Entry Table 12 — Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE MODE ENTER KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION MODES CONTROLLING UNIT CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL RAMP LOAD LIMITED TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE DUAL SETPOINT TEMPERATURE RESET DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING MAKING ICE STORING ICE HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B MINIMUM COMP ON TIME PUMP OFF DELAY TIME LOW SOUND MODE COMMENT MD01 MD02 MD03 MD05 MD06 MD07 MD08 MD09 MD10 MD13 MD14 MD15 MD16 MD17 MD18 MD19 MD20 MD21 MD22 MD23 MD24 MD25 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF CSM SCT WSM — — — LEGEND Chillervisor System Manager Saturated Condensing Temperature Water System Manager Table 13 — Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE CRNT RCRN HIST KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM AXXX OR TXXX YES/NO AXXX OR TXXX ITEM EXPANSION CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS RESET ALL CURRENT ALARMS ALARM HISTORY COMMENT Alarms are shown as AXXX.com manuals search engine . 17 Downloaded from www. Alerts are shown as TXXX.L T. Alerts are shown as TXXX.Manualslib. Range 0-4 hours Default: 0. ENTER ENTER Alarms are shown as AXXX. MD). May be an indication of oversized application. space temperature.2). Demand limit is in effect. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is closed. Timed override is in effect. forcing unit to Occupied mode. and the Saturated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1. Temperature reset is in effect. outdoor-air-temperature. low fluid flow rate or low loop volume.3) to make ice. 01 02 03 05 TIMED OVERRIDE IN EFFECT 06 LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPA ITEM EXPANSION CSM CONTROLLING CHILLER WSM CONTROLLING CHILLER MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL RAMP LOAD LIMITED DESCRIPTION Chillervisor System Manager (CSM) is controlling the chiller. Dual Set Point mode is in effect. Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. 07 LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPB 08 09 10 13 SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE MINIMUM OFF TIME ACTIVE DUAL SETPOINT TEMPERATURE RESET 14 DEMAND/SOUND LIMITED 15 COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION 16 LOW TEMPERATURE COOLING 17 HIGH TEMPERATURE COOLING 18 19 20 MAKING ICE STORING ICE HIGH SCT CIRCUIT A 21 HIGH SCT CIRCUIT B 22 MINIMUM COMP ON TIME 23 PUMP OFF DELAY TIME 24 25 LOW SOUND MODE Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is controlling to Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOL CSP. If the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7. At least one compressor must be on. for 90 seconds. Demand limit can be controlled by switch inputs or a 4 to 20 mA signal.8° C) for 2 minutes.5° F per minute. the chiller may not be able to produce the desired leaving fluid temperature.com manuals search engine . At least one compressor must be on.8° C). This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed schedule. 18 Downloaded from www. Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than the calculated maximum limit. Override expires after each use. Or. If the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point minus 14° F (7. Water System Manager (WSM) is controlling the chiller. Chiller controls to Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOL CSP. Cooling load is satisfied. Slow change override is in effect. The chiller will be shut down when either fluid temperature falls below the Freeze point. Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is negative and decreasing faster than -0. a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit.1° F (0. chiller is using temperature reset to adjust leaving fluid set point upward and is currently controlling to the modified set point.1° F (0. Circuit A cooler Freeze Protection mode.DY). Chiller is in a Cooling mode and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than the calculated maximum limit.Table 14 — Operating Modes MODE NO.6° C) in 10 seconds. No additional stages of capacity will be added. and the Saturated Suction Temperature is not increasing greater than 1. the rate at which leaving fluid temperature is dropped is limited to a predetermined value to prevent compressor overloading. The control will continue to decrease capacity as long as either condition exists.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F (7. In this mode.2° F to 2° F (0.FZ) minus 6° F (3.6° C) in 10 seconds. Chiller capacity may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing condensing temperature. Chiller is in Cooling mode and the rate of change of the leaving fluid is positive and increasing. Chiller operates at higher condensing temperature and/or reduced capacity to minimize overall unit noise during evening/night hours (ConfigurationOPT2LS.1) during occupied periods and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP. Circuit B cooler Freeze Protection mode. Control will automatically unload the chiller if necessary. Ramp load (pull-down) limiting in effect. Chiller is in an unoccupied mode and is using Cooling Set Point 3 (Set PointsCOOL CSP. a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The pull-down limit can be modified.4° C) and less than the leaving fluid temperature minus 14° F (7. Chiller capacity may be reduced if SCT continues to rise to avoid high-pressure switch trips by reducing condensing temperature. The ice done input to the Energy Management Module (EMM) is open. Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time (ConfigurationOPT2DELY).1° to 1° C)/minute. a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. Because of this limitation. Control will automatically load the chiller if necessary to better match the increasing load. if desired. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving towards the control point. Error between leaving fluid and control point exceeds fixed amount. for 90 seconds. however cooler pump continues to run for the number of minutes set by the configuration variable Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (ConfigurationOPT1 PM. Cooling load may be satisfied.2) during unoccupied periods. Dual Chiller control is enabled.Manualslib. In this mode. See Cooling Ramp Loading (ConfigurationSLCTCRMP). Cooler fluid temperatures are approaching the Freeze point (see Alarms and Alerts section for definition). The set point can be modified based on return fluid. to any rate from 0. If the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZ BR.8° C) for 2 minutes. Override can be implemented with unit under Local (Enable) or CCN (Carrier Comfort Network®) control. Or. a stage of capacity will be removed from the circuit. The control will continue to decrease capacity as long as either condition exists. however control continues to operate compressor to ensure proper oil return. or 4 to 20 mA signal. No additional stages of capacity will be added. If the saturated suction temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZ BR.8° C).FZ) minus 6° F (3. This indicates that the capacity of the chiller is being limited by demand limit control option. If necessary. If the problem still persists. See Table 15. the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only. NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) minimum stranded. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. tinned copper. and other functions according to the inputs received. To connect the unit to the network: 1. EMM.’ Control Module Communication RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs (light-emitting diodes). The Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) LED will blink during times of network communication. It contains the major portion of operating software and controls the operation of the machine. Switches 2.) . Consult the CCN Contractor’s Manual for further information.com manuals search engine The 30RAP chiller units can be connected to the CCN if desired. chrome vinyl. If the communication bus is entirely within one building. The communication bus wiring is a shielded. When operating correctly. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison. Belden (8772). The auxiliary board (AUX) has an 8-position DIP switch. Turn off power to the control box. All switches are 19 Downloaded from www. and marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off. 50-mA load. or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of –20 C to 60 C is required. Communication between modules is accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed in the field. Move the switch to the Remote Contact position and a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the chiller. All other boards have a LEN LED which should be blinking whenever power is on. Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch — The Enable/ Off/Remote Contact switch is a 3-position switch used to control the chiller. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+). Check LEN connections for potential communication errors at the board J3 and/or J4 connectors. The J4 connector on the MBB provides both power and communication directly to the marquee display only. and black (–) conductors. This is also required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system element. The MBB is the heart of the ComfortLink control system. See Fig. PVC/nylon. vinyl. The contacts must be capable of handling a 24 vac. 8. set to ‘On’ for these boards. Board Addresses — The main base board (MBB) has a 3-position instance jumper that must be set to ‘1. 5. The positive pin of each system element communication connector must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on either side of it. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC. YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. cooling set point and demand limit functions. 8. The MBB also controls several outputs. CCN configuration and set point data. The MBB continuously monitors input/output channel information received from its inputs and from all other modules. or Columbia (02525) meets the above mentioned requirements.’ The electronic expansion valve board (EXV) and energy management board (EMM) have 4-position DIP switches. When switched to the Enable position the chiller is under its own control. See Fig. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413 or 5463). Move the switch to the Off position to shut the chiller down. Main Base Board (MBB) — See Fig. The EMM module also receives the switch inputs for the field-installed 2-stage demand limit and ice done functions. The EMM module receives 4 to 20 mA inputs for the leaving fluid temperature reset. Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM module is available as a factory-installed option or as a fieldinstalled accessory. Connections to both LEN and CCN buses are made at the LVT (low voltage terminal). the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). Use a similar scheme for cables containing different colored wires. or polyethylene. capacity limit. and the MBB adjusts the control point. reload current software. The MBB receives inputs from the discharge and suction pressure transducers and thermistors. If the communication bus cable exits from one building and enters another. and 7 are set to ‘On. verify that correct power is being supplied to all modules. monitor the status of the compressors by measuring current and providing an analog input to the main base board (MBB) or compressor expansion module (CXB). The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network) bus is also supported. 6 and 7 for control schematics. At each system element. 2. American (A22503).Manualslib. Emergency On/Off Switch — The Emergency On/Off switch should only be used when it is required to shut the chiller off immediately. Teflon. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at LVT. See Fig. In the Enable and Remote Contact (dry contacts closed) positions. PVC/nylon. Power to the MBB. the shields of its communication bus cables must be tied together. 3-5 for typical control box drawings. Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface — Current Sensor Board (CSB) — The CSB is used to AUX Board (AUX) — The AUX is used with the digital scroll option and the low ambient head pressure option. (Substitute appropriate colors for different colored cables. The control system is composed of several components as listed in the sections below. GREEN LED — The MBB has one green LED. the chiller is allowed to operate and respond to the scheduling configuration.CONTROLS General — The 30RAP air-cooled scroll chillers contain the ComfortLink™ electronic control system that controls and monitors all operations of the chiller. Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network). It provides additional inputs and outputs for digital scroll control along with analog outputs to control head pressure control fan speeds. Expansion Valve Board (EXV) — The EXV board communicates with the MBB and directly controls the expansion valves to maintain the correct compressor superheat. Relay outputs controlled by the MBB are shown in Table 17. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC. the red status LEDs should be blinking in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. See Table 16. black for the signal negative. Be sure that the main base board (MBB) is supplied with the current software. The Local Equipment Network (LEN) LED should always be blinking whenever power is on. replace the MBB. A red LED that is lit continuously or blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the board should be replaced. The MBB also receives the feedback inputs from each compressor current sensor board and other status switches. See Table 18. See Fig. 9. and white for the signal ground. These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module. The EMM module communicates the status of all inputs with the MBB. It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify the installation. white (ground). It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive. COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is installed in a well in the factory-installed leaving fluid piping coming from the bottom of the brazed-plate heat exchanger. These sensors are outlined below. LWT. Remote Space Temperature Sensor — Sensor (part no. The sensor should be installed as a wall-mounted thermostat would be (in the conditioned space where it will not be subjected to either a cooling or heating source or direct exposure to sunlight. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on LVT of the plug. B2 PIN CONNECTION POINT J7-1.4 (MBB) Circuit B (035-060 only) Return Gas Temperature J8-7. 2.9 J9-2. DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (DTT) — This sensor is only used on units with a digital compressor. EWT. check the CCN connector and cable. The RJ14 CCN connector on LVT can also be used. To connect the space temperature sensor (Fig.6 J9-8. Sensors — The electronic control uses 4 to 7 thermistors to 20 Downloaded from www.2 (MBB) Circuit A Return Gas Temperature J8-3. A2 Compressor Fault Signal. and OAT are identical in temperature versus resistance and voltage drop performance. The dual chiller thermistor is 5 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. connect 1 wire of the twisted pair to one SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other SEN terminal located under the cover of the space temperature sensor. The RJ11 connector is used access into the Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) at the sensor. Space temperature thermistor is a 10 kat 77 F (25 C). If abnormal conditions occur. Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to terminals in the unit main control box.12 J9-5. 33ZCT55SPT) is an accessory sensor that is remotely mounted in the controlled space and used for space temperature reset.2 J7-3. Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring 1895 — A21451 A48301 8205 884421 D6451 — M13402 M64430 6130 — LEGEND LWT — Leaving Water Temperature MBB — Main Base Board Table 16 — Status Inputs STATUS SWITCH Chilled Water Pump 1 Chilled Water Pump 2 Remote On/Off Cooler Flow Switch Compressor Fault Signal. COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR — The thermistor is installed in a well in the factory-installed entering fluid piping coming from the top of the brazed-plate heat exchanger. Table 15 — Thermistor Designations THERMISTOR LWT EWT RGTA RGTB OAT SPT DTT PIN CONNECTION THERMISTOR INPUT POINT J8-13. This sensor is a connected to the AUX board. and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).6 Temperature Sensor or Dual LWT Sensor J6-1.060) Energize Compressor A2 (all but 010. See Thermistors section for temperature-resistance-voltage drop characteristics.6 (MBB) Accessory Remote Space TB5-5.14 (MBB) Cooler Leaving Fluid J8-11. Thermistors RGTA. a laptop computer running Service Tool). See Table 15.3. IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting.14 J7-9. REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR DUAL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR — One of two inputs can be connected to the LVT. The DTT thermistor is an 86 kat 77 F (25 C)thermistor. B1 Compressor Fault Signal. If conditions return to normal.2 (AUX) Discharge Temperature Thermistor Table 18 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring MANUFACTURER Alpha American Belden Columbia Manhattan Quabik PART NO. The space temperature sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female connector. RGTB. The sensor is mounted on the discharge line close to the discharge of the digital compressor. 015 60 Hz) Energize Chilled Water Pump 1 Output Energize Chilled Water Pump 2 Output Energize Compressor B1 (035-050) Energize Compressor B1 and Condenser Fan Contactor 3 (055. 4.Manualslib. the white wire to COM terminal.com manuals search engine .060) Energize Compressor B2 (035-060) Alarm Relay Cooler/Pump Heater Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 1 (018-060) Energize Condenser Fan Contactor 2 (018-060) Minimum Load Valve sense temperatures for controlling chiller operation. COMPRESSOR RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE SENSOR — These thermistors are installed in a well located in the suction line of each circuit.12 (MBB) Cooler Entering Fluid J8-1. unplug the connector. See appropriate sensor below. OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (OAT) — This sensor is factory installed on a bracket which is inserted through the base pan of the unit. A short in one section of the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the bus. A1 Compressor Fault Signal. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 5 and 6 on TB5 located in the unit control box. K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 DESCRIPTION Energize Compressor A1 (010-030) Energize Compressor A1 and Condenser Fan Contactor 3 (055.3 Table 17 — Output Relays RELAY NO.8 (MBB) Outdoor-Air Temperature Sensor J8-5. and the black wire to the (–) terminal. It attaches to the discharge line using a spring clip and protects the system from high discharge gas temperature when the digital compressor is used. but is only intended for temporary connection (for example.4 LVT-13.10 J9-11. 10): 1. Run new cable if necessary. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for the application. Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11 connector into the CCN (Fig. 11): IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 18 for acceptable wiring. 1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white (ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.) 2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the space temperature sensor terminal block. 3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of the space temperature sensor. 4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the space temperature sensor. 5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to the remainder of the CCN communication bus. Dual Leaving Water Temperature Sensor — For dual chiller applications (parallel only are supported), connect the dual chiller leaving fluid temperature sensor (refer to Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control section on page 36) to the space temperature input of the Master chiller. If space temperature is required for reset applications, connect the sensor to the Slave chiller and configure the slave chiller to broadcast the value to the Master chiller. LEGEND FOR FIG. 3-7 ALMR AUX BR C CB CCB CH CHC COMP CSB CWFS CWP DGS DPT DTT DUS EMM EXV FB FC FCB FIOP FR GND HPS LON LVT MBB MLV MM MP MS NEC OAT OFM RGT SCCR SPT SW TB TNKR TRAN UPC — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Alarm Relay Auxilliary Boiler Relay Contactor, Compressor Circuit Breaker Compressor Circuit Breaker Crankcase Heater Cooler/Pump Heater Contactor Compressor Current Sensor Board Chilled Water Flow Switch Chilled Water Pump Digital Scroll Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer Discharge Temperature Thermistor Digital Unloader Solenoid Energy Management Electronic Expansion Valve Fuse Block Fan Contactor Fan Circuit Breaker factory Installed Option Fan Relay Ground High-Pressure Switch Local Operating Network Low Voltage Terminal Block Main Base Board Minimum Load Valve Motormaster Motor Protector Manual Starter National Electrical Code Outdoor-Air Thermistor Outdoor Fan Motor Return Gas Thermistor Short Circuit Current Rating Suction Pressure Transducer Switch Terminal Block Storage Tank Heater Relay Transformer Unitary Protocol Converter Terminal Block Terminal (Unmarked) Terminal (Marked) Splice Factory Wiring Field Wiring Accessory or Option Wiring To indicate common potential only; not to represent wiring. 21 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV EMM EXV CHC CCB FB-1 TRAN AUX LON UPC TB1 FAN 1 CSB-A1 DISCONNECT OPTION/TB TB4 MS- MSCWP1 CWP2 CWP1 CWP2 MBB COMPRESSOR C-A1 MM A1 CONTROL BOX a30-4962 Fig. 3 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP010,015 FB-1 EMM EXV CHC CCB-1 FB-3 TRAN CCB-2 AUX LON UPC TB1 CSB-A1 CSB-A2 TB4 MS- MSCWP1 CWP2 DISCONNECT OPTION/TB MBB C-A1 FC1/MM CWP1 CWP2 FC2 C-A2 Fig. 4 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP018-030 a30-4963 22 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine a30-4964 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine EMM EXV CHC TRAN-1 CB-2 FCB-1/2/3 TB1 AUX TB4 FR-3 CB-1 CB-3 CB-4 TRAN-2 CSB-A1 CSB-A2 LON UPC CSB-B1 MS- MSCWP1 CWP2 CWP1 CWP2 CSB-B2 DISCONNECT OPTION/TB 23 C-A2 FC-1 MM MBB FC-2 FC-3 LOCATED OVER EMM AND EXV FR-1 FR-2 FR-4 C-A1 C-B1 C-B2 FAN 3 FAN 1 FAN 4 FAN 2 COMPRESSORS 055,060 UNIT ONLY A1 A2 B1 B2 CONTROL BOX END Fig. 5 — Typical Control Box for 30RAP035-060 230-3-60 380-3-60.5 FNM-10 FNQ-R-2.575-3-60 208/230-3-60 380-3-60.460-3-60. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE. 6A — Typical Wiring Schematic. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED-THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE PHASE CONDITIONS. ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES. 4. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS: 018-020: ALL UNITS 025.Manualslib.460-3-60.5 FNM-6 LP-CC-20 KTK-R-15 KTK-R-20 LP-CC-20 LP-CC-20 BLU YEL BLK BLU GRN/YEL BLK BLK COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (208/230. REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.020: ALL UNITS 025.575-3-60 TRAN SIZE 200VA REPLACE WITH FNQ-R-3. 30RAP018-030 Units — Power Wiring 24 .575-3-60 LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FB3 BLK 11 YEL 12 BLU 13 21 22 23 FIOP/ACCESSORY 1 2 3 MMR 14 FROM AUX-J4 208/230-3-60 FB1 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 MM-A BLK YEL BLU L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 2 *1 25 2 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 OFM1 GRN/YEL * MM SIGNAL CONNECTION TB 1 13A VOLTAGE 208/230/460/575 380 HZ 60 60 HIGH SCCR ONLY YEL VIO 11 240 1/4W RED BLK FB2 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 FC2 21 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 CHC 1 2 3 1 3 2 OFM2 22 23 GRN/YEL ~ ~ ~ BLK 4 2 BLK WHT BLK BLK 1 2 CHC COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (380. 8. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED FU1 FU2 CONNECT FOR APPROPRIATE PRIMARY VOLTAGE SEE TABLE 1 H1 BLK YEL TRAN1 PRIMARY H3 H2 3. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED.500 500 600 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR PRIMARY SIDE H1-H2 H2-H4 H3-H4 H1-H4 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SECONDARY SIDE XF-X2 XF-X2 XF-X2 XF-X2 FB3 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 FB1 BLK 11 YEL 12 BLU 13 21 22 23 BLK YEL BLU BLK YEL 11 12 13 11 12 13 FC1 21 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 CHC 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2 OFM2 OFM1 22 23 LOAD 208-3-60 460-3-60 HIGH SCCR ONLY FC2 GRN/YEL 21 22 23 FUSE NUMBER FU1 & FU2 UNIT VOLTAGE 208/230-3-60 380-3-60 460-3-60 575-3-60 380-3-60.460-3-60.575V ONLY CSB-A1 21 BLU BLK CH-A1 BLK CA1 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLK YEL BLU 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 22 23 YEL BLU YEL BLU BLK COMP A1 GRN/YEL VIO CB3 3.OPTIONAL DISCONNECT CB1A TO FUSED DISCONNECT 1 STANDARD TERMINAL BLOCK TB1A 11 21 BLK BLK BLK CCB-1 BLK YEL BLU YEL BLK BLU 11 12 13 380V.030: 460V UNITS 11.575-3-60 208/230-3-60. C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY. 5.460-3-60. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY.230V) ~ ~ BLK 4 2 BLK WHT 1 2 FU3 (24V) FU5 & FU6 FU4 (115V) FB1 (NO MM) FB1 (WITH MM) FB2 FB3 208/230-3-60 460-3-60.030: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL 10. H4 SECONDARY 24V XF TB4 5 X2 GRN/YEL TB1 C BRN 7. FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC 1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD.460.575V) ~ ~ ~ 208/230-3-60 380-3-60. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING. TERMINALS 13 & 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION OF REMOTE ON-OFF.230V) ~ ~ ~ YEL TABLE 1 VOLTAGE 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208-3-60 460-3-60 SERIES 100 200 500 500 600 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR PRIMARY SIDE H1 & H2 H1 & H2 H2 & H4 H3 & H4 H1 & H4 8 6 BLK WHT 3 NOTES: 1. 9. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF 2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED. FU3 X1 RED BRN BRN C TB1 3 UPC FIOP 24VAC BRN RED 2 1 3 2 1 VIO TB4 6 BRN VIO 2 GND 1 HOT UPC FIOP/ACCESSORY 3 2 1 BRN RED 3 2 1 J1 EXV J2 3 2 1 3 2 1 VIO BRN VIO 3 2 1 3 2 1 J1 MBB J2 3 2 1 3 2 1 J1 EMM J2 3 2 1 3 2 1 BRN RED 2 1 DGS FIOP 12 11 AUX J1 a30-4965 BRN 1 VIO BRN 3 CWFS BLU BRN Fig.460V.575-3-60 200VA 500VA 500VA NONE NONE NONE NONE CHC COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (380.com manuals search engine TO FUSED DISCONNECT PER NEC EQUIP GND PER NEC 2 12 22 YEL YEL YEL 3 13 23 BLU BLU BLU CCB-2 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLU BLK CSB-A2 CH-A2 CA2 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLK YEL BLU BLK YEL BLU 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 COMP A2 GRN/YEL 208/230V ONLY TRAN3 WHT X3 SILVER SCREW TB4 7 RED A1 ~ 2 RED SW2 C1 B1 ~ FU5 RED FU6 BLK 1 H4 H3 H2 1 MS-CWP1 BLK YEL BLU L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP CWP1 L1 T1 BLK BLK ~ HF H1 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L2 L3 T2 T3 CWP1 WATER PUMP GRN/YEL BLK SECONDARY 115V X1 FU4 XF MS-CWP2 BLK YEL BLU L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 GRN/YEL L1 L2 L3 CWP2 T1 T2 T3 BLK BLK BLK GFI-CO FIOP/ACCESSORY LINE RESET TEST BLK CWP2 WATER PUMP GRN/YEL 2 BRASS SCREW VOLTAGE 575-3-60 GRN-YEL 230-3-60 SERIES 100 400.575V) COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (208/230.575-3-60 YEL 8 6 BLK WHT 3 208/230-3-60 380-3-60.575-3-60 208/230-3-60 380-3-60.460.460-3-60. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS: 018. 6.5 FNQ-R-2 FNQ-R-1. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS.5 FNQ-R-3. TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3 & H4.460-3-60.5 FNQ-R-2.2 AMPS Downloaded from www. 4-20mA 9 + TEMP RESET . 30RAP018-030 Units — Control Wiring 25 a30-4966 .4-20mA J1 RED BLK PORT 2 1 NET + 2 NET 3 N/C 4 N/C WHT 5 SIGNAL PORT 1A 1 NET + 2 NET 2 3 SHIELD Downloaded from www.CB1 3.2 AMPS TRAN1 RED TB1 TB4 4 MBB J10A 1 2 RLY 11 TB4 5 ORN 1 2 3 RED 4 5 6 RED 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RED 8 9 10 RED RED CB2 5.4-20mA 7 8 + DEMAND LIMIT . 6B — Typical Wiring Schematic.Manualslib.2 AMPS A2 SW2 C2 ORN ORN B2 RED TB4 7 RED RED XF BRN FU3 X1 MBB J1-2 UPC GND CWFS 3 EXV J1-2 LVT J12-5 A2 CHC A2 CA1 A2 CWP1 RED PL1-3 RED RED PL1-7 RED RED SEE NOTE 9 PL1-4 BRN PL1-8 BRN BRN BRN SECONDARY 24V X2 GRN/YEL BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN C T2 MP-A1 T1 SEE NOTE 10 T2 MP-A2 T1 BLK BRN BRN BRN 3 4 5 GRA GRA GRA BRN BRN MLV-A MLV ACCSY PNK BRN RLY 9 6 7 8 PNK A1 FC1 A2 BRN BRN A2 A2 CA2 FC2 SEE NOTE 7 RLY 10 9 10 11 12 ORN ORN A1 FC2 A2 BRN BRN A2 A2 FC1 FC3 J10B RLY 5 RLY 6 13 14 15 RED TB4 4 J11 LVT 18 MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED 10VA INRUSH ALM R TNK R LVT 21 J12 5 RLY 7 16 17 18 RED 1 ACCESSORY STORAGE TANK HEATER RELAY RED BRN C TB1 ORN RLY 8 19 ORN HPS-A ORN BLK A1 CHC A2 BRN C TB1 20 RLY 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 BLK BLK BLK PL1-1 21 22 ORN SEE NOTE 11 MP-A1 VIO PL1-2 M1 VIO M2 VIO ORN A1 CA1 A2 BRN C A2 A2 TB1 CA2 CA1 BRN PL1-6 PL1-5 RLY 2 23 24 GRA SEE NOTE 11 MP-A2 VIO M1 VIO M2 VIO GRA A1 CA2 A2 BRN RLY 3 25 26 VIO 1 J12 LVT 25 24 VIO A1 CWP 1 CWP 2 A2 BRN C A2 A2 TB1 CWP2 CWP1 BRN RED RLY 4 27 RED 2 A1 A2 BRN LVT HEAT 20 19 FIOP OR FIELD INSTALLED OPTION J12 6 7 GRA GRA 6 5 4 3 ALMR BR 6 5 4 3 2 1 FIELD INSTALLED MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED 10VA INRUSH SEE NOTES ON PAGE 24.com manuals search engine SHIELD 1 2 3 4 5 UPC LON OPTION J3 GND NET J4 1 2 21 22 23 24 25 RED GRN BLK RED GRN BLK B C A B C A + + - DPTA J6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SPTA UPC OPT 26 Fig. HR VIO BRN 2 1 J6 HEAT/BOILER FIELD INSTALLED WIRING LVT 17 J11 2 BLK 4 CWFS 2 WHT 10 10 4 4 3 2 1 3 CWPI SEE NOTE 8 1 1 2 3 4 RED WHT BLK BLK WHT RED 3 2 1 4 J3 ORN 9 9 2 3 4 J3 EXV 1 1 2 3 4 5 J7 2 3 4 5 11 11 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 RED WHT BLK BRN RED RED WHT BLK RED BRN 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 MARQUEE DISPLAY 4 BLK WHT RED 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 12 J4 MAIN BASE BOARD 3 4 5 6 J4 1 1 2 3 4 5 PL-EXVA BLK WHT GRN RED BLK YEL J6 2 3 4 5 EXV-A GRY RED 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 RED ORN BRN RED ORN BRN RED ORN BRN RED ORN BRN 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 CSB B2 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 9 RED SW1 A1 ENABLE RED C1 B1 8 8 REMOTE ON-OFF SWITCH (SEE NOTE 5) 14 7 OFF 7 7 J9 CSB A2 3 2 1 3 2 1 G + G + AUX J2 CH1 7 8 7 8 PL50-1 VIO BRN RED BLK DUS PL50-2 CH11 - 6 7 8 9 10 RED 8 RED CSB B1 BLK WHT RED J9 DGS OR MM FIOP ON OFF J6 J4 J5 1 2 1 2 PL50-3 RED BLK RED BLK DTT PL50-4 CH9 - 15 6 GRA 6 6 11 CSB A1 1 2 1 2 RED BLK TO MM-A DUAL SETPOINT 16 5 GRA 5 J7 12 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CH10 - RED BLK RGTA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DARK = SWITCH LOCATION 1 2 1 2 RED 13 14 CWP2 RED 4 4 3 4 3 3 J12 BLU BLU RED BLK LVT T55 23 22 SEN T-55 ACCSY 5 6 3 4 OAT VIO 13 14 CWP1 VIO 2 4 BLK WHT RED 3 2 1 2 4 3 2 1 7 8 1 1 SPACE TEMPERATURE ACCESSORY OR DUAL CHILLER LWT J3 EMM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J10 GRA GRA RED RED BLU BLU 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 LVT 1 2 3 4 5 6 ICE DONE DLS STEP 1 DLS STEP 2 9 10 LVT LEN (+) J13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BLK WHT RED BRN RED BLK WHT RED BRN RED BLK WHT RED BLK WHT RED 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RED BLK RED BLK EVAPORATOR ENTERING FLUID TEMP 4 BLK 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J7 J4 FIOP/ ACCESSORY J8 J5 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CCN RED WHT BLK (-) (COM) EVAPORATOR LEAVING FLUID TEMP WHT RED 14 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PNK VIO BRN ORN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 + COOLING SETPOINT . 460-3-60.OPTIONAL DISCONNECT CB1A TO FUSED DISCONNECT 1 STANDARD TERMINAL BLOCK TB1A 11 21 BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL BLU BLU BLU BLU BLU CCB-1 BLK YEL BLU YEL BLK BLU 11 12 13 380V. THE CONTACT MUST BE RATED FOR DRY CIRCUIT APPLICATION CAPABLE OF HANDLING A 5VDC 1 MA TO 20 MA LOAD. 030-050: FAN CONTACTOR FC1 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR.575-3-60 208/230-3-60 575-3-60 380-3-60.460-3-60.460.230-3-60 380-3-60.060: FAN CONTACTOR FC3 IS REPLACED WITH MOTORMASTER RELAY MMR. 7. 8.575-3-60 GRN/YEL HIGH SCCR ONLY ~ ~ ~ 208/230-3-60 BLK 4 2 BLK WHT BLK BLK 1 2 CHC COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (380.5 FNQ-R-2 FNQ-R-1. TRAN1 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS MUST BE MOVED TO TERMINALS H3 & H4. FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER FCB2 IS REPLACED WITH FUSE BLOCK FB2.460-3-60.230V) ~ ~ ~ YEL 8 6 BLK WHT BRN BRN RED BRN FCB2/FB2 BLK 3 2 1 SEE NOTE 7 21 22 23 3 C TB1 3 11 12 13 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 FC2 21 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 UPC FIOP 24VAC BRN RED 2 1 VIO TB4 6 BRN VIO 2 GND 1 HOT UPC FIOP/ACCESSORY 3 J1 EXV J2 3 3 YEL BLU 22 23 OFM1 2 1 2 1 GRN/YEL VIO BRN VIO 3 2 1 3 2 1 J1 MBB J2 3 3 BRN RED 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 J1 EMM J2 3 2 1 3 2 1 DGS FIOP BRN RED 2 1 12 11 OFM2 AUX J1 BLK YEL 11 12 13 FC1 GRN/YEL 21 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 22 23 OFM3 (055.5 FNQ-R-2. 30RAP035-060 Units — Power Wiring 26 .460-3-60.040: ALL UNITS 045-060: 460V UNITS 13. VIO CB3 3. MP-A2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS: 035-045: ALL UNITS 050-060: 460V UNITS 12. 4.5 FNQ-R-3.500 500 600 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR PRIMARY SIDE H1-H2 H2-H4 H3-H4 H1-H4 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SECONDARY SIDE XF-X2 XF-X2 XF-X2 XF-X2 208/230V ONLY MS-CWP1 BLK YEL BLU BLK L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 CHILLED WATER PUMP FIOP CWP1 L1 T1 BLK BLK L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 LOAD 208-3-60 460-3-60 L2 L3 T2 T3 CWP1 WATER PUMP GRN/YEL BLK MS-CWP2 L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 CWP2 T1 T2 T3 BLK BLK BLK FUSE NUMBER FU1 & FU2 UNIT VOLTAGE 208/230-3-60 380-3-60 460-3-60 575-3-60 380-3-60. MP-B1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS: 035.575V ONLY CSB-A1 21 BLU BLK CH-A1 BLK CA1 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLK YEL BLU 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 22 23 YEL BLU YEL BLU BLK COMP A1 GRN/YEL NOTES: 1. 3. ALL FIELD INTERLOCK CONTACTS MUST HAVE A MIN RATING OF 2 AMPS @ 24VAC SEALED.040: ALL UNITS 045-060: 460V UNITS 14.Manualslib. 5.5 FNM-6 LP-CC-20 KTK-R-15 KTK-R-20 LP-CC-20 LP-CC-20 YEL BLU CWP2 WATER PUMP GRN/YEL FU3 (24V) FU5 & FU6 FU4 (115V) FB1 (NO MM) FB1 (WITH MM) FB2 FB3 208/230-3-60 460-3-60. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED-THREE PHASE MOTORS PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE PHASE CONDITIONS.575V ONLY CSB-B1 21 BLU BLK BLK CB1 11 12 13 21 22 23 TRAN3 WHT X3 SILVER SCREW TB4 7 RED A1 ~ 2 RED SW2 C1 B1 ~ BLK YEL BLU 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 1 H4 H3 H2 1 ~ HF H1 22 23 YEL BLU YEL BLU BLK COMP B1 GRN/YEL SECONDARY 115V X1 FU4 XF GRN/YEL CCB-4 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLU BLK CSB-B2 CH-B2 GFI-CO FIOP/ACCESSORY LINE RESET TEST CB2 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLK BLK YEL BLU BLK YEL BLU 1 2 3 T1 T2 T3 2 COMP B2 GRN/YEL BRASS SCREW VOLTAGE 575-3-60 GRN-YEL 230-3-60 SERIES 100 400. REMOVE JUMPER FROM TERMINAL 11 TO 17 AND WIRE INTERLOCK CONTACT ACROSS TERMINALS 11 & 17.575V) 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (208/230.. SEE FIELD INTERLOCK WIRING.5 FNM-10 FNQ-R-2. 055. USE 75 C MIN WIRE FOR FIELD POWER SUPPLY.230V) ~ ~ ~ YEL 9. FOR UNITS WITH LOW AMBIENT MOTOR MASTER V FIOP/ACCESSORY.575-3-60 22 23 208/230-3-60 380-3-60.060 ONLY) a305283 BRN 1 VIO BRN 3 BLU CWFS BLU BRN (055. FOR 575-3-60V UNITS.460-3-60. 2.460.060 ONLY) GRN/YEL TABLE 1 VOLTAGE 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208-3-60 460-3-60 SERIES 100 200 500 500 600 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR PRIMARY SIDE H1 & H2 H1 & H2 H2 & H4 H3 & H4 H1 & H4 VOLTAGE 575-3-60 380-3-60 230-3-60 208-3-60 460-3-60 TABLE 2 SERIES 100 200 500 500 600 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS FOR PRIMARY SIDE COM & 575 COM & 380 COM & 230 COM & 208 COM & 460 LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FB3 BLK 11 YEL 12 BLU 13 21 22 23 FIOP/ACCESSORY 1 2 3 OFM3 (035-050) OFM4 (055.com manuals search engine TO FUSED DISCONNECT PER NEC EQUIP GND PER NEC 2 12 22 CCB-2 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLU BLK CSB-A2 CH-A2 CA2 11 12 13 21 22 23 3 13 23 BLK YEL BLU BLK YEL BLU 1 2 3 CH-B1 T1 T2 T3 COMP A2 GRN/YEL 208/230V ONLY FU5 RED FU6 BLK CCB-3 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 380V. 7A — Typical Wiring Schematic.2 AMPS SECONDARY 24V RED GRN/YEL FU3 X1 X2 GRN/YEL CHC COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (380. ANY FIELD MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS MUST BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES. 6.060) FB1 BLK 11 YEL 12 BLU 13 21 22 23 MM-A BLK YEL BLU L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 2 *1 25 2 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 GRN/YEL * MM SIGNAL CONNECTION TB 1 13A VOLTAGE 208/230/460/575 380 HZ 60 60 FU1 FU2 CONNECT FOR APPROPRIATE PRIMARY VOLTAGE SEE TABLE 1 H1 BLK YEL HIGH SCCR ONLY YEL BLK YEL CONNECT FOR APPROPRIATE PRIMARY VOLTAGE SEE TABLE 2 575 460 400 380 230 MMR VIO 11 14 1/4W 240 RED BLK FROM AUX-J4 TRAN1 PRIMARY H3 H2 H4 COM TRAN2 PRIMARY 208 CHC ~ ~ ~ BLK 4 2 BLK WHT BLK BLK 1 2 SECONDARY 24V XF CB4 3.060 ONLY) BLK YEL BLU (055.575-3-60 208/230-3-60. TERMINALS 13 & 14 OF LVT ARE FOR FIELD CONNECTION OF REMOTE ON-OFF. 10.575V) 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (208/230.575-3-60 200VA 500VA 500VA NONE NONE NONE NONE FB3 BLK 11 YEL 12 BLU 13 21 22 23 FB1 BLK 11 YEL 12 BLU 13 21 22 23 BLK 11 YEL 12 BLU 13 FC1 21 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 CHC 1 2 3 OFM3 208/230-3-60 380-3-60.060 ONLY) GRN/YEL Fig.575-3-60 TRAN SIZE 200VA REPLACE WITH FNQ-R-3. MP-B2 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS: 035. FOR 500 SERIES UNIT OPERATION AT 208-3-60V LINE VOLTAGE. IF CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK IS USED.460V. JUMPER PLUG REQUIRED WHEN MP NOT USED 8 6 BLK WHT FCB2/FB2 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 SEE NOTE 7 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 3 FC2 21 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 BLK-1 BLK-2 22 23 OFM1 GRN/YEL OFM2 YEL BLK BLU BLK YEL 11 12 13 BLK-3 FC3 GRN/YEL 21 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 22 23 OFM4 (055.460V. FACTORY WIRING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL 1995 STANDARDS. MP-A1 NOT USED IN THE FOLLOWING UNITS: 035-045: ALL UNITS 050-060: 460V UNITS WITHOUT DIGITAL SCROLL 11.2 AMPS Downloaded from www. 2 AMPS A2 SW2 C2 ORN ORN B2 RED TB4 7 RED RED XF BRN FU3 X1 MBB J1-2 UPC GND CWFS 3 A2 CB1 RED PL1-3 RED RED PL1-7 RED RED PL2-3 RED RED PL2-7 RED RED SEE NOTE 10 PL1-4 BRN PL1-8 BRN PL2-4 BRN PL2-8 BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN SECONDARY 24V X2 GRN/YEL BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN C T2 MP-A1 T1 SEE NOTE 11 RED BLK BLU GRA GRA GRA BRN LVT J12-5 A2 CHC A2 CA1 A2 CWP1 T2 MP-A2 T1 SEE NOTE 12 BRN BRN BRN T2 MP-B1 T1 SEE NOTE 13 3 4 5 BRN MLV-A MLV ACCSY PNK T2 MP-B2 T1 BRN RLY 9 6 7 8 PNK A1 FC1 A2 BRN BRN BRN A2 A2 A2 A2 C A2 CA2 FC2 FC1 FC3 TB1 CB2 LEGEND X X TERMINAL BLOCK TERMINAL (UNMARKED) TERMINAL (MARKED) SPLICE FACTORY WIRING FIELD WIRING ACCESSORY OR OPTION WIRING TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIAL ONLY.060 ONLY) 10 (055.com manuals search engine SHIELD 1 2 3 4 5 UPC LON OPTION J3 GND NET J4 1 2 SPTB 21 22 23 24 25 DPTA J6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SPTA UPC OPT 26 Fig.a30-5284 MBB J10A 1 2 RLY 11 CB1 3.NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING ACCESSORY ALARM RELAY AUXILIARY BOILER RELAY CONTACTOR.060 ONLY) FR3 CB2 PL2-5 RLY 6 13 14 15 PNK RED MP-B2 VIO PL2-6 M1 VIO M2 VIO PNK BRN A2 CB1 TB4 4 SEE NOTE 14 1 FR4 J11 LVT 18 MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED 10VA INRUSH ALM R TNK R LVT 21 J12 5 RLY 7 16 17 18 RED 1 ACCESSORY STORAGE TANK HEATER RELAY RED BRN C TB1 RLY 8 19 ORN HPS-A ORN BLK A1 CHC A2 BRN BRN C C A2 TB1 TB1 CA2 20 RLY 1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 BLK BLK BLK PL1-1 21 22 ORN SEE NOTE 14 MP-A1 VIO PL1-2 M1 VIO M2 VIO ORN ORN A1 1 A1 GRA CA1 A2 0 A2 0 A2 BRN (055.060 ONLY) FR1 CA2 PL1-5 MP-A2 VIO PL1-6 RLY 2 23 24 GRA SEE NOTE 14 M1 VIO M2 VIO GRA BRN A2 CA1 1 A1 FR2 CWP 1 CWP 2 RLY 3 25 26 VIO TAN RED FR4 1 2 J12 LVT 25 24 VIO BRN C A2 A2 TB1 CWP2 CWP1 BRN RED RLY 4 27 A1 A2 BRN 4 LVT HEAT 20 19 2 J12 6 7 GRA GRA 6 5 4 3 ALMR BR TAN 6 5 4 3 2 1 (055.4-20mA 9 + TEMP RESET .060 ONLY) BRN BRN (055.Manualslib.060 ONLY) PNK FR3 FIOP OR FIELD INSTALLED OPTION 4 2 HR VIO BRN 2 1 J6 TAN (055.4-20mA J1 RED BLK PORT 2 1 NET + 2 NET 3 N/C 4 N/C WHT 5 SIGNAL PORT 1A 1 NET + 2 NET 2 3 SHIELD Downloaded from www.2 AMPS TRAN1 TB4 5 ORN 1 2 3 RED 4 5 6 RED 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RED 8 9 10 RED ORN HPS-B RED TB1 TB4 4 CB2 5.060 ONLY) PNK FR1 ACCSY ALMR AUX BR C CB CCB CH CHC CO COMP CSB CWFS CWP CWPI DGS DLS DPT DTT DUS EMM EWT EXV FB FC FCB FIOP FR FU GND HPS HR LVT LWT MBB MLV MM MMR MP MS OAT OFM PL R RGT RLY SAT SCCR SPT SW TB TNKR TRAN UPC LVT 17 4 J11 2 BLK 4 CWFS 2 PNK A1 FC3 A2 BRN A2 FC2 2 WHT 10 (055. 7B — Typical Wiring Schematic.060 ONLY) PNK FR2 FIELD INSTALLED MAX LOAD-5VA SEALED 10VA INRUSH 4 TAN 2 HEAT/BOILER FIELD INSTALLED WIRING (055.4-20mA 7 8 + DEMAND LIMIT .060 ONLY) SEE NOTE 8 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 CWPI SEE NOTE 9 1 1 2 3 4 RED WHT BLK BLK WHT RED 4 J3 ORN 9 9 2 3 4 J3 EXV 1 1 2 3 4 5 PL-EXVB BLK WHT GRN RED PL-EXVA BLK WHT GRN RED BLK YEL J7 2 3 4 5 EXV-B GRY RED 11 11 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 RED WHT BLK BRN RED RED WHT BLK RED BRN 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 MARQUEE DISPLAY 4 BLK WHT RED 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 12 J4 MAIN BASE BOARD 3 4 5 6 J4 1 1 2 3 4 5 BLK YEL J6 2 3 4 5 EXV-A GRY RED 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 RED ORN BRN RED ORN BRN RED ORN BRN RED ORN BRN 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 CSB B2 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 9 RED SW1 A1 ENABLE RED C1 B1 8 8 REMOTE ON-OFF SWITCH (SEE NOTE 5) 14 7 OFF 7 7 J9 CSB A2 3 2 1 3 2 1 G + G + AUX J2 CH1 7 8 7 8 PL50-1 VIO BRN RED BLK DUS PL50-2 CH11 - 6 7 8 9 10 RED 8 RED CSB B1 BLK WHT RED J9 DGS OR MM FIOP ON OFF J6 J4 J5 1 2 1 2 PL50-3 RED BLK RED BLK DTT PL50-4 CH9 - 15 6 GRA 6 6 11 CSB A1 1 2 1 2 RED BLK TO MM-A DUAL SETPOINT 16 5 GRA 5 J7 12 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CH10 - RED BLK RED BLK BLU BLU RED BLK RGTA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DARK = SWITCH LOCATION 1 2 1 2 RED 13 14 CWP2 RED 4 4 3 4 RGTB 3 3 J12 3 4 OAT LVT T55 23 22 SEN T-55 ACCSY 5 6 VIO 13 14 CWP1 VIO 2 4 BLK WHT RED 3 2 1 2 4 3 2 1 7 8 1 1 SPACE TEMPERATURE ACCESSORY OR DUAL CHILLER LWT J3 EMM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 J10 GRA GRA RED RED BLU BLU 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 LVT 1 2 3 4 5 6 ICE DONE DLS STEP 1 DLS STEP 2 9 10 LVT LEN (+) J13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BLK WHT RED BRN RED BLK WHT RED BRN RED BLK WHT RED BLK WHT RED 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RED BLK RED BLK RED GRN BLK RED GRN BLK RED GRN BLK RED GRN BLK EVAPORATOR ENTERING FLUID TEMP 4 BLK 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J7 J4 FIOP/ ACCESSORY J8 J5 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CCN RED WHT BLK (-) (COM) EVAPORATOR LEAVING FLUID TEMP B C A B C A B C A B C A WHT RED + + + + - DPTB 14 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PNK VIO BRN ORN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 + COOLING SETPOINT . COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT BREAKER COMPRESSOR CIRCUIT BREAKER CRANKCASE HEATER COOLER/PUMP HEATER CONTACTOR CONVENIENCE OUTLET COMPRESSOR CURRENT SENSOR BOARD CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH CHILLED WATER PUMP CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK DIGITAL SCROLL DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR DIGITAL UNLOADER SOLENOID ENERGY MANAGEMENT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL BOARD FUSE BLOCK FAN CONTACTOR FAN CIRCUIT BREAKER FACTORY INSTALLED OPTION FAN RELAY FUSE GROUND HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH HEAT RELAY LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE MAIN BASE BOARD MINIMUM LOAD VALVE MOTORMASTER MOTORMASTER RELAY MODULAR MOTOR PROTECTOR MANUAL STARTER OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR PLUG RELAY RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE RELAY SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER SWITCH TERMINAL BLOCK STORAGE TANK HEATER RELAY TRANSFORMER UNITARY PROTOCOL CONVERTER SEE NOTE 8 RLY 10 9 10 11 12 ORN BLU BLK BLK BLU ORN A1 FC2 A2 BRN BRN J10B RLY 5 PL2-1 VIO SEE NOTE 14 MP-B1 VIO PL2-2 M1 VIO M2 VIO VIO VIO A1 1 A1 PNK CB1 A2 0 A2 0 BRN (055.060 ONLY) BRN BRN (055. 30RAP035-060 Units — Control Wiring 27 . 8 — Main Base Board a30-4967 Fig. 11 — CCN Communications Bus Wiring to Optional Space Sensor RJ11 Connector 28 Downloaded from www. 10 — Typical Space Temperature Sensor Wiring Fig.RED LED .Manualslib. 9 — Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch.STATUS GREEN LED LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) YELLOW LED CCN (CARRIER COMFORT NETWORK) INSTANCE JUMPER CEPL130346-01 K11 K10 K9 J1 J2 STATUS K8 K7 K6 K5 J4 J3 LEN J10 K4 K3 K2 K1 CCN J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 Fig. 33ZCT55SPT 6 T-55 SPACE SENSOR SENSOR SEN SEN LVT 3 4 TO CCN COMM 1 BUS (PLUG) AT UNIT CCN+ CCN GND 5 4 3 CCN- 2 1 Fig.com manuals search engine . and Emergency On/Off Switch Locations a30-4968 SPT (T10) PART NO. This ratio value ranges from –100 to +100%. 50 mA load) • 4 to 20 mA demand limit (requires field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator) • Discrete input for Ice Done switch (requires fieldsupplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac. a minimum off time (DELY. and alarm or alert conditions present. The control will also use the minimum load valve solenoid as the last stage of capacity before turning off the last compressor. but should not be adjusted unless absolutely necessary. ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. the A1 compressor operates continuously. Entering fluid temperature is used by the main base board (MBB) to determine the temperature drop across the cooler and is used in determining the optimum time to add or subtract capacity stages. the control starts (stops) a compressor when the ratio reaches +100% (–100%). The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. the minimum load valve solenoid will be energized with the first stage of capacity. The digital compressor is always the last compressor to shut off. full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Each refrigeration circuit is also supplied with a factory-installed liquid line filter drier and sight glass. or outdoor-air temperature reset features. MINUTES OFF TIME (ConfigurationOPT2 DELY) — This user-configurable time period is used by the control to determine how long unit operation is delayed after power is applied/restored to the unit. It can also be reset from an external 4 to 20-mA signal (requires energy management module FIOP or accessory). the low pressure logic will be bypassed for 21/2 minutes to allow for the transient changes during start-up. As additional stages of compression are required. The superheat set point is adjustable.8 C). The standard control has an automatic lead-lag feature built in which determines the wear factor (combination of starts and run hours) for each compressor.Manualslib. This makes it possible for unit to start at high cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the compressor. The chilled fluid temperature set point can be automatically reset by the return fluid temperature. this time period is configured when multiple machines are located on a single site. and minimum load valve solenoids (if equipped) to maintain the user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. Typically. This can include being unoccupied. this gives the user the ability to prevent all the units from restarting at once after a power failure.This factory-installed option (FIOP) or field-installed accessory is used for the following types of temperature reset. CCN not allowing unit to start. If the machine should be running and none of the above are true. on/off cycling of the unit’s compressors is dramatically reduced. Electronic Expansion Valves (EXV) — All units are Capacity Control — The control system cycles compressors. Minimum load valve value is a fixed 30% in the total capacity calculation. For example. If the leaving fluid temperature is less than the saturated condensing temperature. and/or ice features: • 4 to 20 mA leaving fluid temperature reset (requires field-supplied 4 to 20 mA generator) • 4 to 20 mA cooling set point reset (requires fieldsupplied 4 to 20 mA generator) • Discrete inputs for 2-step demand limit (requires fieldsupplied dry contacts capable of handling a 24 vac. The A circuit is also always the lead for units with the digital compressor option. ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch in the OFF position. Energy Management Module (Fig. This value can be zero without the machine running in many situations. During startup. Loss-of-Cooler Flow Protection — A proof-ofcooler flow device is factory installed in all chillers. If the next stage of capacity is a compressor. 50 mA load) See Demand Limit and Temperature Reset sections on pages 41 and 37 for further details. The EXVs will provide a controlled start-up. equipped from the factory with EXVs. A value of zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be running. For this reason.com manuals search engine . the processor control will add them. providing close leaving chilled water control. If all compressors are off and less than 30 minutes has elapsed since the last compressor was turned off. see below) may be in effect. It is recommended that proper operation of the switch be verified on a regular basis. 29 Downloaded from www. For units with the minimum load control valve. a capacity ratio is calculated using the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any changes to the current stages of capacity. ComfortVIEW™ or ComfortWORKS® software) and represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit will start its initialization routine. The EXV is designed to limit the cooler saturated suction temperature to 50 F (12.0° C) suction superheat leaving the cooler by metering the proper amount of refrigerant into the cooler. then the control will start either compressor A1 or compressor B1 first. Refer to Table 19. the compressor with the lowest wear factor will be shut off first except when a digital compressor is used. The machine should start normally once the time limit has expired. no call for cooling due to no load. See Table 19. which in turn reduces wear associated with compressor start/stop cycles. The EXV is set at the factory to maintain 9° F (5. 12) — CAUTION Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufacturer’s control systems due to possible power supply differences. If installed. On units with the digital scroll option. The algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired set point. the control reads the entering and leaving fluid temperatures. depending on the user-configurable circuit lead-lag value. demand limit. the wear factor is used to determine which compressor to start next. the A circuit with the minimum load valve is always the lead circuit. digital scroll modulting solenoid (if equipped). The two different power supplies cannot be mixed. space. Next. A signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge signal generating device is used. the wear factor is still used to determine which compressor to start next. The control determines the rate at which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based on these conditions. If no compressors have been running for more than 30 minutes and the leaving fluid temperature is greater than the saturated condensing temperature. If a circuit is to be stopped. Demand Limit in effect. Each time it runs. MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed only in the network display tables (using Service Tool. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity step change. The range is from 1.0.0. 12 — Energy Management Module LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION — This is a configurable choice and is factory set to be automatic for all units unless the unit is equipped with a digital scroll compressor or minimum load.0 for systems with small loop volumes. If the close control feature is enabled the minimum load control valve may be used as needed to obtain leaving fluid temperature close to set point. the control will modify the routine with a 1. Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and which is the lag are also made when total machine capacity is at 100% or when there is a change in the direction of capacity (increase or decrease) and each circuit’s capacity is equal.GN) has a default value of 1. the control makes 2 comparisons before deciding to change stages of capacity.com manuals search engine when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of capacity.0. the control will sum the current number of logged circuit starts and one-quarter of the current operating hours for each circuit. this factor is applied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor. If exactly 25% cannot be removed. This factor is also applied 30 Downloaded from www. Minimum Load Control — If equipped.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more than the configured Cooling Ramp Loading value (CRMP). Slow Change Override — The control prevents the capacity stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and moving towards the set point. the longer the control will delay between adding or removing stages of capacity. CEPL130351-01 J1 J2 TEST 1 . Ramp Loading — Ramp loading (ConfigurationSLCTCRMP) limits the rate of change of leaving fluid temperature. the control removes an amount greater than 25% but no more than necessary.2 factor on adding the first stage to reduce cycling. This value should be set in the range of 3. then circuit A is lead (ConfigurationOPT2 LLCS).STATUS GREEN LED LEN (LOCAL EQUIPMENT NETWORK) ADDRESS DIP SWITCH Fig.0 to 4. When set to other than 1. Set at automatic. Deadband Multiplier — The user configurable Deadband Multiplier (ConfigurationSLCTZ. The lowest stage will not be removed. First Stage Override — If the current capacity stage is zero. CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following overrides will modify the normal operation of the routine.Manualslib. The larger this value is set. the control will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being used. If the difference is greater than 4° F (2.0 to 4. The circuit with the lowest sum is started first. Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading — When the entering fluid temperature is below the control point. The control calculates a temperature difference between the control point and leaving fluid temperature.CEBD430351-0396-01C PWR J4 J3 STATUS LEN J5 J7 J6 TEST 2 RED LED . Figure 13 shows how compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving water temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and below the set point. the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of capacity. The value can be changed to Circuit A or Circuit B leading as desired. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and configured for Ramp Loading. the minimum load control valve is energized only when one compressor is running on circuit A. Manualslib. Standard Units with Minimum Load Valve 30RAP UNIT SIZE 010 015 018 020 025 030 CONTROL STEPS 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 CAPACITY STEPS % Displacement 100 100 100 50 20* 100 50 24* 100 50 29* 100 50 32* 100 77 50 23 9* 100 73 50 23 11* 100 74 50 24 12* 100 75 50 25 14* 100 73 50 23 13* 100 75 50 25 16* Circuit A 100 100 100 100 100 100 CAPACITY % Circuit B — — — — — — 035 54 46 040 47 53 045 47 53 050 50 50 055 46 54 060 50 50 *Minimum Load Valve energized. 13 — Deadband Multiplier 31 Downloaded from www. NOTE: These capacity steps may vary due to different capacity staging sequences.com manuals search engine .Table 19 — Part Load Data Percent Displacement. DEADBAND EXAMPLE 47 8 46 45 2 STARTS LWT (C) LWT (F) 7 44 43 42 6 5 41 0 200 400 600 800 1000 3 STARTS TIME (SECONDS) LEGEND LWT — Leaving Water Temperature STANDARD DEADBAND MODIFIED DEADBAND Fig. Cooler Freeze Protection — The control will try to prevent shutting the chiller down on a Cooler Freeze Protection alarm by removing stages of capacity. If the cooler fluid selected is Water, the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C). If the cooler fluid selected is Brine, the freeze point is the Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZBR.FZ). This alarm condition (A207) only references leaving fluid temperature and NOT Brine Freeze point. If the cooler leaving fluid temperature is less than the freeze point plus 2.0° F (1.1° C), the control will immediately remove one stage of capacity. This can be repeated once every 30 seconds. Low Saturated Suction Protection — The control will try to prevent shutting a circuit down due to low saturated suction conditions by removing stages of capacity. These circuit alert conditions (T116, T117) compare saturated suction temperature to the configured Brine Freeze Point (Set PointsFRZBR.FZ). The Brine Freeze point is a userconfigurable value that must be left at 34 F (1.1 C) for 100% water systems. A lower value may be entered for systems with brine solutions, but this value should be set according to the freeze protection level of the brine mixture. Failure to properly set this brine freeze point value may permanently damage the brazed plate heat exchanger. The control will initiate Mode 7 (Circuit A) or Mode 8 (Circuit B) to indicate a circuit’s capacity is limited and that eventually the circuit may shut down. be added to the current fan stage. Fan On Set Point (F.ON) equals Head Set Point (Set PointsHEADH.DP) except after a fan stage increase when the Head Set Point is increased by Fan Stage Delta (Set PointsHEADF.DLT). A fan stage is decreased when the SCTs of both circuits are less than the Fan Off Set Point (Set PointsHEAD F.OFF) for two minutes. Table 20 shows the number of fan stages, contactors energized and the fans that are on during the fan stage. Unit sizes 035 to 060 have common fan control. Figure 14 shows the location of each fan and compressor within the unit. MOTORMASTER® V OPTION — Motormaster V is standard on 30RAP010 and 015 size units. For all other units that need low-ambient operation, the lead fan on a circuit can be equipped with the Motormaster V head pressure controller option or accessory. The controller is energized with the first fan stage and adjusts fan speed to maintain a SCT of 72 F (22.2 C). The first stage of fan operation is controlled by the Motormaster V controller. Refer to Fig. 15 for condenser fan layout information. The Motormaster is configured in the Motormaster Select (ConfigurationMMMMR.S) Head Pressure Control — The main base board (MBB) controls the condenser fans to maintain the lowest condensing temperature possible, and thus the highest unit efficiency. The MBB uses the saturated condensing temperature input from the discharge pressure transducer and outside air temperature sensor to control the fans. If OAT is greater than 70 F before a circuit is starting, then all condenser fan stages will be energized. A fan stage is increased based on SCT (saturated condensing temperature). When the highest SCT is greater than the Fan On Set Point (Set PointsHEADF.ON), then an additional stage of fan will 170 160 150 140 130 120 110 configuration of the Control Method (ConfigurationOPT2CTRL) and Cooling Set Point Select (ConfigurationSLCTCLSP) variables. All units are factory configured with Cooling Set Point Select set to 0 (single set point). With the control method set to 0, simply switching the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed) will put the chiller in an occupied state. The control mode (Operating ModesMODE) will be 1 (OFF LOCAL) when the switch is Off and will be 5 (ON LOCAL) when in the Enable position or Remote Contact position with external contacts closed. Operation of Machine Based on Control Method and Cooling Set Point Selection Settings — Machine On/Off control is determined by the SCT SST — Saturated Condensing Temperature — Saturated Suction Temperature Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine SCT (F) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 SST (F) LEGEND a30-4969 Fig. 14 — Operating Envelope for R-410A Compressor 32 OFM1 a30-4970 CONTROL BOX CONTROL BOX OFM1 OFM2 Top View Sizes 010,015 Top View Sizes 018-030 CONTROL BOX OFM3 OFM2 CONTROL BOX OFM1 OFM1 OFM3 OFM2 OFM4 Top View Sizes 035-050 Top View Sizes 055,060 Fig. 15 — 30RAP Condenser Fan Layout Table 20 — Fan Stages 30RAP UNIT SIZE 010,015 018-030 035-050 Fan Stage Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 FAN STAGES Contactor Energized — FC1 FC1,2 FC1 FC2 FC1,2 FC3 FC1,3 FC3,2 FC1,2,3 Fans Operating OFM1 OFM1 OFM1,2 OFM3 OFM1,2 OFM1,2,3 OFM4 OFM4,3 OFM4,1,2 OFM1,2,3,4 055,060 Two other control methods are available for Machine On/ Off control: OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE (ConfigurationOPT2 CTRL = 2) — The main base board will use the operating schedules as defined under the Time Clock mode in the scrolling marquee display. These schedules are identical. The schedule number must be set to 1 for local schedule. The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65 to 99 for operation under a CCN global schedule. The Enable/Off/ Remote Contact must be in the Enable or Remote Contact position. The control mode (Operating ModesMODE) will be 1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 3 when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and the time of day is during an unoccupied period. Similarly, the control mode will be 7 when the time of day is during an occupied period. CCN CONTROL (ConfigurationOPT2CTRL = 3) — An external CCN device such as Chillervisor System Manager controls the On/Off state of the machine. This CCN device forces the variable ‘CHIL_S_S’ between Start/Stop to control the chiller. The control mode (Operating ModesMODE) will be 1 when the switch is Off. The control mode will be 2 when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On and 33 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Stop.’ Similarly, the control mode will be 6 when the CHIL_S_S variable is ‘Start.’ Table 20 illustrates how the control method and cooling set point select variables direct the operation of the chiller and the set point to which it controls. The illustration also shows the ON/OFF state of the machine for the given combinations. Cooling Set Point Select SINGLE — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1). DUAL SWITCH — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1) when the Dual Set Point switch contacts are open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2) when they are closed. DUAL CCN OCCUPIED — Unit operation is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.1) during the Occupied mode and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointsCOOLCSP.2) during the Unoccupied mode as configured under the local occupancy schedule accessible only from CCN. Schedule Number in Table SCHEDOVR (See Appendix B) must be configured to 1. If the Schedule Number is set to 0, the unit will operate in a continuous 24-hr Occupied mode. Control method must be configured to 0 (switch). See Table 21. Table 21 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points CONTROL TYPE (CTRL) 0 (switch) 2 (Occupancy) 3 (CCN) OCCUPANCY STATE Occupied Unoccupied Occupied Unoccupied Occupied Unoccupied 0 (single) ON,CSP1 ON,CSP1 ON,CSP1 OFF ON,CSP1 ON,CSP1 COOLING SET POINT SELECT (CLSP) 1 2 (dual, switch) (dual, occ) ON* ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP2 ON* Illegal OFF Illegal ON* ON,CSP1 ON* ON,CSP2 3 (4 to 20 mA) ON† ON ON† OFF ON† ON† *Dual set point switch input used. CSP1 used when switch input is open. CSP2 used when switch input is closed. †Cooling set point determined from 4 to 20 mA input to energy management module (EMM) to terminals TB6-3,5. 4 TO 20 mA INPUT — Unit operation is based on an external 4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module (EMM). Low Sound Mode Operation — All models are factory configured with the Low Sound Mode disabled. In the Configuration mode under sub-mode OPT2, items for Low Sound Mode Select (ConfigurationOPT2LS.MD), Low Sound Start Time (ConfigurationOPT2LS.ST), Low Sound End Time (ConfigurationOPT2LS.ND) and Low Sound Capacity Limit (ConfigurationOPT2LS.LT) are factory configured so that the chiller always runs as quietly as possible. This results in operation at increased saturated condensing temperature. As a result, some models may not be able to achieve rated efficiency. For chiller operation at rated efficiency, disable the low sound mode or adjust the low sound mode start and stop times accordingly or set both times to 00:00 for rated efficiency operation 24 hours per day. In addition, the low sound capacity limit can be used to reduce overall chiller capacity, if required, by limiting the maximum to a userconfigured percentage. Heating Operation — The chiller can be used for pump outputs or optional factory-installed hydronic system operation can be utilized for heating applications. The heating mode is activated when the control sees a field-supplied closed switch input to terminal block LVT-19,20. The control locks out cooling when the heat relay input is seen. A field-supplied boiler relay connection is made using heat relay and alarm relay contacts. Factory-installed ‘BOILER’ connections exist in the control panel near LVT for these applications. Alarms and alerts A189 through A202 are active during heating operation. under the COMP mode will stay on for 10 minutes if there is no keypad activity. Compressors will stay on until they are turned off by the operator. The Service Test mode will remain enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors running. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during the TEST mode. The MODE item (Run StatusVIEW) will display “0” as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chiller can be switched to Enable or Remote contact for normal operation. Optional Factory-Installed Hydronic Package — If the chiller has factory-installed chilled fluid pumps, specific steps should be followed for proper operation. The pump(s) in the hydronic package come factory pre-wired into the main unit power supply/starter. In order to check proper pump rotation, use the Service Test function to test the condenser fans and observe them for proper rotation. If fans turn correctly, the pumps will rotate correctly. Clockwise rotation of the pump motor cooling fans can also be used to determine that pumps are rotating correctly. CAUTION Operation of pump in wrong direction, even for a few seconds, can cause irreversible damage to pump impeller and housing. Always verify correct wiring/pump rotation before operation. Use Service Test function to test operation of pumps. Verify that the flow switch input is made when the pump is running. For dual pump hydronic systems, the control only uses one pump at a time. Consult the Installation Instructions supplied with this chiller and use the circuit setter balancing valve installed in hydronic package to adjust fluid flow rate. Cooler Pump Control — The AquaSnap® 30RAP machines equipped with a factory-installed pump package are configured with the Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) = ON. Machines not equipped with a pump package are configured with the cooler pump control OFF. It is recommended that the machine control the chilled water pump. If not, a 5-minute time delay is required after the command to shut the machine down is sent before the chilled water pump is turned off. This is required to maintain water flow during the shutdown period of the machine. With or without this option enabled, the cooler pump relay will be energized when the machine enters an ON status (i.e., On Local, On CCN, On Time). An A207 - Cooler Freeze Protection Alarm, will energize the cooler pump relay also, as an override. The cooler pump relay will remain energized if the machine is in MODE 10 – Minimum Off Time. Service Test (See Table 4) — Both main power and control circuit power must be on. The Service Test function should be used to verify proper operation of condenser fan(s), compressors, minimum load valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s), EXVs, and remote alarm relay. To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/ Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Use the display keys and Table 4 to enter the mode and display TEST. Press ENTER twice so that OFF flashes. Enter the password if required. Use either arrow key to change the TEST value to the ON position and press ENTER . Press ESCAPE and the button to enter the OUTS or COMP sub-mode. Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes. Use the arrow keys to select the desired percentage when testing expansion valves and Motormaster® V controller. When testing compressors, lead compressor must be started first. All compressor outputs can be turned on, but the control will limit the rate by staging one compressor per minute. Compressor unloaders and hot gas bypass relays/solenoids (if installed) can be tested with the compressors on or off. The relays 34 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine With this feature enabled. • Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1 PM2E) = NO. • Cooler Pump 1 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1 PM1E) = YES. The unit will not be allowed to start. the machine starts its capacity routine. as defined by the one of the following conditions. The starter for Chilled Water Pump 2 should be wired between LVT-24 and LVT-21. the following options must be configured: • Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) = ON. Enable-Off-Remote Switch in REMOTE with a Start-Stop remote contact closure (CTRL=0). 4. the cooler pump relay will be enabled. The chilled water pump 35 Downloaded from www. CWP2. an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start. there are certain alarm conditions and Operating Modes that will turn the cooler pump relay ON. An Occupied Time Period from an Occupancy Schedule in combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=2). When the unit cycles from an “On” state to an “Off” state. an auxiliary set of contacts is wired to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump Interlock. The Cooler Pump Relay will be energized when the machine is “On.” The chilled water pump interlock circuit consists of a chilled water flow switch and a field-installed chilled water pump interlock. Cooler Pump Select (ConfigurationOPT1PM. DUAL INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a dual integral pump package. a T194 — Cooler a30-4979 Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert is generated and the unit is shut down. As stated before. This is configurable from 0 to 10 minutes. As part of the factory-installed package. If the chilled water pump interlock circuit does not close within five (5) minutes of starting. an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the machine will stop. the pump can be started to maintain lubrication of the pump seal. If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is OFF. it will be started and operated for 2 seconds starting at 14:00 hours. If the control detects the chilled water flow switch circuit closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output OFF. 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. the Cooler Pump Starter will be energized when the machine is occupied. SINGLE INTEGRAL PUMP CONTROL — With a single pump. the cooler pump output will remain energized for the Cooler Pump Shutdown Delay (ConfigurationOPT1PM. the following options must be configured: • Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) = ON. 1. If the auxiliary contact interlock does not close within 25 seconds of the ON command. The starter should be wired between LVT-25 and LVT-21.DY). A T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start. If the pump has failed and an Alarm/Alert condition is active. CWP1. If equipped. The starter coil is powered from the chiller control system. a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1 Running Alert and an A201 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the machine will stop. 10 VA inrush at 24 volts. The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump Starters is 5 VA sealed. the pump interlock and flow switch is checked. The starter coil is powered from the chiller control system. If the pump is operating. must be connected to MBB-J7-3 and –4. With a single integral pump. the following options must be configured: • Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) = ON. (CTRL=0). If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds after initially being closed.P. The chilled water pump 2 interlock. a T190 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert will be generated and the pump shut down. If the chilled water pump interlock or chilled water flow switch opens for at least three (3) seconds after initially being closed. must be connected to MBBJ7-1 and –2. the following options must be configured: • Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPT1CPC) = OFF. The chilled water pump 1 interlock. Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (ConfigurationOPT1 PM. To utilize this function. If the circuits are closed. This sequence will describe the normal operation of the pump control algorithm. The starter for Chilled Water Pump 1 should be wired between LVT-25 and LVT-21.SL) is factory defaulted to 0 (Automatic).Manualslib. if the pump is not operating. NO INTEGRAL PUMP — SINGLE EXTERNAL PUMP CONTROL — With a single external pump. If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit closes for at least 20 seconds. Pump Start Selection is a field-configurable choice.Cooler Pump Sequence of Operation — At anytime the unit is in an ON status. the pump will not start that day. • Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1 PM2E) = YES. a T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Closed While Pump Off Alert is generated. 3. The factory default is 1 minute. • Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1 PM2E) = NO. The maximum load allowed for the Chilled Water Pump Starter is 5 VA sealed. • Cooler Pump 1 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1 PM1E) = NO. If the chilled water flow switch does not close within one (1) minute. When the mechanical cooling is called for. The Enable-Off-Remote Switch in ENABLE. The unit will be prevented from starting. This value can be changed to 1 . As part of a pump maintenance routine. • Cooler Pump 1 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1 PM1E) = YES. This option is set to NO as the factory default. A field-installed chilled water pump interlock for each pump must be connected to each pump’s interlock points on the main base board. A CCN Start-Stop Command to Start in combination with items 1 or 2 (CTRL=3).S) must be set to YES. 2. • Cooler Pump 1 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1 PM1E) = YES. NO INTEGRAL PUMP — DUAL EXTERNAL PUMP CONTROL — With two external pumps. this routine is skipped. an A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed to start. an A189 — Cooler Pump and Aux Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. If the control detects the chilled water pump interlock open for 25 seconds after initially being closed. two alarms will be generated. The chiller will not be allowed to start. the fieldinstalled chilled water pump starter auxiliary contacts should be connected in series with the chilled water flow switch.com manuals search engine interlock contacts should be rated for dry circuit application capable of handling 5 vdc at 2 mA. • Cooler Pump 2 Enable (ConfigurationOPT1 PM2E) = YES. If the chilled water flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds after initially being closed. The Pump Changeover Hours is factory defaulted to 500 hours. The Rotate Cooler Pump Now (ROT.(Pump 1 Starts First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First). Configuration examples are shown in Tables 22 and 23. This control algorithm is designed for parallel fluid flow arrangement only. 16 and 17 and connected to the master chiller.Manualslib. The unit will be prevented from starting. The CCN communication bus must be connected between the two chillers. In this example the master chiller will be configured at address 1 and the slave chiller at address 2. If the control detects that the chilled water pump auxiliary contacts are closed for at least 25 seconds while the pump is OFF.PS) must be set to YES. LLBD and LLDY are not used by the slave chiller.DT) is reached. for wiring. With the machine at Capacity Stage 0. The master and slave chillers must reside on the same CCN bus (ConfigurationCCN CCNB) but cannot have the same CCN address (ConfigurationCCNCCNA). With a call for mechanical cooling. A T193 — Cooler Pump 2 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start. If flow is proven. Also in this example. The pump with the lowest operational hours will be the lead pump. the appropriate T194 — Cooler Pump 1 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert or T195 — Cooler Pump 2 Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alert is generated and the unit is shut down.DT) is reached. 3 (No Pump). If the circuits are closed. To utilize this function. an A202 — Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off Alarm will be generated and the unit will not be allowed to start. Manual changeover can be accomplished by changing Rotate Cooler Pump Now (ConfigurationOPT1ROT. the master chiller will be configured to use Lead/Lag Balance Select (ConfigurationRSETLLBL) and Lead/Lag Balance Delta (ConfigurationRSETLLBD) to even out the chiller run-times weekly. it will not be considered for the lead pump. the lead pump will be turned OFF. two alarms will be generated. Master/Slave Select (ConfigurationRSET MSSL) must be configured to MAST for the master chiller and SLVE for the slave. In either fault case listed above. A T192 — Cooler Pump 1 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Alert and an A200 — Cooler Flow/ Interlock Failed to Close at Start-Up Alarm will be generated and chiller will not be allowed to start. an A189 – Cooler Pump and Aux Contact Input Miswire Alarm will be generated. The variables LLBL. the unit must be at Capacity Stage 0. If feature is enabled and the pump(s) are not operating. a manual changeover can be accomplished by changing PM. If available. the Cooler Pump Starter will be energized when the machine is in an occupied period. the machine will be allowed to restart. As part of a pump maintenance routine. the pump selection is based on two criteria: the alert status of a pump and the operational hours on the pump. 36 Downloaded from www. The Lead Pump (Run StatusVIEWLD. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller. two units supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. any pump that has an active alert will not be allowed to start. the appropriate T198 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Closed While Pump Off or Alert T199 — Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Closed While Pump Off Alert is generated.DT) is reached. Pump 2 will be commanded to start once Pump 1 has failed. Approximately one (1) second later. the specific pump interlock and flow switch are checked. Pump 1 will be commanded to start once Pump 2 has failed. The Lag Start Delay (ConfigurationRSETLLDY) feature will be set to 10 minutes. the machine starts its capacity routine.DT is not satisfied. 2 (Pump 2). If flow is proven.PM) indicates the pump that has been selected as the lead pump: 1 (Pump 1). for wiring information.com manuals search engine If the control starts a pump and the wrong interlock circuit closes for at least 20 seconds. If PM. the other as the slave. The unit will not be allowed to start.SL is 0 (Automatic). the pumps would rotate automatically as part of the normal routine. With the dual integral pump package. The unit will not be allowed to start.SL only.P) to YES only if the machine is at Capacity Stage 0 and the differential time limit Pump Changeover Hours (PM. Both master and slave chillers must have Lead/Lag Chiller Enable (ConfigurationRSET LLEN) configured to ENBL. a T190 — Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert will be generated and the pump shut down.SL) set to 1 (Pump 1 Starts First) or 2 (Pump 2 Starts First). then the pumps will be operated every other day for 2 seconds starting at 14:00 hours. If Pump 1 starts and the auxiliary contact interlock does not close within 25 seconds of the ON command.P) feature does not work for these configuration options. If the chilled water flow switch does not close within one (1) minute. With Cooler Pump Select (ConfigurationOPT1 PM. If a pump has an active Alert condition. page 19. During changeover the chilled water flow switch input is ignored for 10 seconds to avoid a nuisance alarm. Cooler Pmp Periodic Start (ConfigurationOPT1 PM. If the chilled water flow switch does not close within 1 minute. it will not be started that day. The chiller will not be allowed to start. A pump is selected by the control to start and continues to be the lead pump until the Pump Changeover Hours (ConfigurationOPT1PM. Two methods will change the pump sequence. the other pump will be started. one set for each pump to individual channels on the MBB. two alarms will be generated. the pumps can be started to maintain lubrication to the pump seal. Before the changeover can occur. the machine will be allowed to restart. If a pump has failed and has an active Alert condition. Parallel configuration (ConfigurationRSETPARA) can only be configured to YES. a T191 — Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Alert will be generated and the pump shut down. The machine RemoteOff-Enable Switch must be in the OFF position to change this variable. This option is set to NO as the factory default. a T196 — Flow Lost While Pump 1 Running Alert or T197 — Flow Lost While Pump 2 Running Alert for the appropriate pump and an A201 — Cooler Flow/ Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Alarm will be generated and the machine will stop. An additional leaving fluid temperature thermistor (Dual Chiller LWT) must be installed as shown in Fig. the other pump will be started. If the PM. This will prevent the lag chiller from starting until the lead chiller has been at 100% capacity for the length of the delay time. As part of the factory-installed package. With Cooler Pump Select (PM. the changeover will not occur. If the control detects that the chilled water flow switch circuit is closed for at least 5 minutes with the pump output OFF. an auxiliary set of contacts is wired to the MBB to serve as Chilled Water Pump Interlock. page 20. If Pump 2 starts and the auxiliary contact interlock does not close within 25 seconds of the ON command. If available.SL) set to 0 (Automatic) and when the differential time limit Pump Changeover Hours (ConfigurationOPT1 PM. The control will allow for pump changeover. Refer to Table 22 for dual chiller configuration. If the chilled water pump interlock opens for 25 seconds after initially being closed is detected by the control. the lag pump will start. Refer to Carrier Comfort Network® Interface section. Refer to Sensors section. In either fault case listed above. Regardless of the Cooler Pump Selection. Connections can be made to the CCN screw terminals on LVT. Configuring and Operating Dual Chiller Control — The dual chiller routine is available for the control of . com manuals search engine .Automatic LLBL ENTER 0 0 2 ENTER 37 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) SUB-MODE DISP UNIT OPT1 ENTER ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS CTRL 0 OPT2 CCN CONTROL METHOD SWITCH DEFAULT 0 OPT2 CTRL ENTER ESCAPE CCNA ENTER 1 CCNB CCN ADDRESS DEFAULT 1 CCN CCNB ENTER 0 CCN RSET CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0 ESCAPE PROCEED TO SUBMODE RESET COOLING RESET TYPE LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED ENTER CRST LLEN LLEN ENTER DSBL DSBL ENBL ENTER LLEN ENTER ENBL LLEN MSSL ESCAPE MASTER /SLAVE SELECT MASTER /SLAVE SELECT DEFAULT MAST MSSL ENTER MAST MSSL SLVA ESCAPE RSET SLAVE ADDRESS SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT 2 SLAVE ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED SLVA ENTER 0 0 2 ENTER SLVA ENTER 2 SLVA LLBL ESCAPE LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT 2 . The Enable/Off/ Remote Contact switch should be in the Remote Contact position on both the Master and Slave chillers. Both chillers will stop if the Master chiller Enable/Off/ Remote Contact switch is in the Off position. If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Master chiller the Slave chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode. Dual chiller start/stop control is determined by configuration of Control Method (ConfigurationOPT1CTRL) of the Master chiller. use either: • HH79NZ014 sensor/10HB50106801 well (3-in.4) 4.10 (78.1) 1.495 B 0. THERMISTOR WIRING* LEAVING FLUID PART NUMBER 10HB50106801 10HB50106802 A DIMENSIONS in. See Tables 24 and 25. Master Control Method (CTRL) can be configured as 0-Switch. Because the change in temperature through the cooler is a measure of the building load.PT). The Slave chiller should always be configured for CTRL=0 (Switch). both Master and Slave chillers should be enabled together. The Enable/Off/ Remote Contact switch should be in the Enable position for CTRL=2 (Occupancy) or CTRL=3 (CCN Control). 2-Occupancy or 3-CCN. The master chiller controls the slave chiller by changing its Control Mode (Run StatusVIEWSTAT) and its operating setpoint or Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCT. If the chillers are to be controlled by Remote Contacts. The energy management module (EMM) must be used for temperature reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal. 17 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well RETURN FLUID MASTER CHILLER SLAVE CHILLER INSTALL DUAL CHILLER LWT LEAVING FLUID TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR (T10) HERE Temperature Reset — The control system is capable of handling leaving-fluid temperature reset based on return cooler fluid temperature. If the Emergency Stop switch is turned off or an alarm is generated on the Slave chiller the Master chiller will operate in a Stand-Alone mode.Table 22 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Master Chiller Example) (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM LLBL KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER DISPLAY 2 LLBL LLBD ITEM EXPANSION LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT COMMENTS CHANGE ACCEPTED ESCAPE LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA DEFAULT 168 LLBD ENTER 168 LLBD LLDY ESCAPE LAG START DELAY SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT 10 LAG START DELAY CHANGE ACCEPTED RSET LLDY ENTER 5 5 10 ENTER LLDY ENTER 10 LLDY RSET YES ESCAPE ESCAPE PARA ENTER MASTER COMPLETE NOTES: 1. The control system is also capable of temperature reset based on outdoor-air temperature (OAT).Manualslib.28 (32. *Depending on piping sizes.10 (104.7) 1. 6” MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR THERMISTOR REMOVAL Fig. 2. (mm) A B 3.61 DIA 1/4 N. Parallel Configuration (PARA) cannot be changed.505/0.P.com manuals search engine . sensor/well) Fig. space temperature (SPT). Accessory sensors must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). sensor/well) • HH79NZ029 sensor/10HB50106802 well (4-in. 16 — Dual Chiller Thermistor Location 38 Downloaded from www.55 (39.T. Two separate relays or one relay with two sets of contacts may control the chillers. or from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. the return temperature reset is in effect an average building load reset method.5) 0. Slave CCN Bus Number (CCNB) must be the same as Master 4.Manualslib. or LLDY to be configured. LLBD. 2. Slave Control Method (CTRL) must be configured for 0. Slave does not require SLVA.com manuals search engine . LLBL. Slave CCN Address (CCNA) must be different than Master. 39 Downloaded from www.Table 23 — Dual Chiller Configuration (Slave Chiller Example) SUB-MODE DISP UNIT OPT1 ENTER ITEM KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENTS CTRL 0 CONTROL METHOD SWITCH DEFAULT 0 OPT2 CTRL ESCAPE OPT2 CCN CCNA CCNA ENTER 1 1 2 CCN ADDRESS SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT 2 (SEE NOTE 1) ENTER CCN CCNA ENTER 2 CCN 0 CCN RSET CCN ADDRESS CHANGE ACCEPTED ESCAPE CCNB ENTER CCN BUS NUMBER DEFAULT 0 (SEE NOTE 2) ESCAPE PROCEED TO SUBMODE RSET COOLING RESET TYPE LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE 15 ITEMS SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT ENBL LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE CHANGE ACCEPTED ENTER CRST LLEN LLEN ENTER DSBL DSBL ENBL ENTER LLEN ENTER ENBL LLEN MSSL ESCAPE RSET MASTER /SLAVE SELECT SCROLLING STOPS VALUE FLASHES SELECT SLVE MASTER /SLAVE SELECT CHANGE ACCEPTED MSSL ENTER MAST MAST SLVE ENTER MSSL ENTER SLVE MSSL RSET ESCAPE ESCAPE SLAVE COMPLETE NOTES: 1. 3. 0 F (29. The variable RM.NO should be set to the cooler temperature difference (T) where no chilled water temperature reset should occur. In the Configuration mode under the sub-mode RSET. To use outdoor air or space temperature reset.7 to 16. The variable RM. and (ConfigurationOPT1RT. RT.F and RT.DG NOTE: The example above shows how to configure the chiller for 4 to 20 mA reset. An EMM is required. To use return reset.0 mA. ComfortLink™ controls incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. and subtract the active set point (Run StatusVIEWSETP) from the control point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) to determine the degrees reset.3 C) reset at 55.DG should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired. and a 5.0 F (12.6 C) cooler T. Table 25 — Menu Configuration of 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Control MODE (RED LED) KEYPAD SUB-MODE KEYPAD ENTRY ENTRY ENTER ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT DISP UNIT OPT1 OPT2 HP.DG must be properly set.DG should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired. (ConfigurationOPT1RM. In the Configuration mode under the submode RSET.0 F (2.8 C) outdoor-air temperature. This example provides 5.F should be set to the cooler temperature difference where the maximum chilled water temperature reset should occur.NO). sub-mode VIEW. four variables must be configured. To verify that reset is functioning correctly proceed to Run Status mode.1 C) cooler T and 0° F (0° C) reset at 10. A signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.0 F (20.0 F (22.8 C) chilled water set point reset at 2.MST RSET DMDC SLCT ENTER CLSP 0 0 0 4 COOLING SETPOINT SELECT Scrolling Stops Flashing ‘0’ Select ‘4’ Change Accepted ENTER ENTER ENTER 4 IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when interfacing with other control systems due to possible power supply differences: full wave bridge versus half wave rectification.3 C) reset at 68.A HP. See Table 26B — Configuring Return Temperature Reset.0 F (5.0 F reset will occur at 20.com manuals search engine be configured for the type of reset desired.NO should be set to the temperature that no reset should occur.0 F (8.Manualslib. items (ConfigurationOPT1CRST).DG) must be properly set. . The variable RM.0 F (2.F).0 C) space temperature. items CRST.2 C) space temperature and 6. The variable RT.NO.A EXV.8 C) RSET MA.B EXV. four variables must be configured.0 F (3. See Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset. Figures 18 and 19 are examples of outdoor air and space temperature resets.7 C) ENTER CRST 1 5. No reset will occur at 4. Connection of control devices with different power supplies may result in permanent damage. The variable RT.0 F (1.F should be set to the temperature that maximum reset is to occur. The variable CRST should 40 Downloaded from www. RT.B CONFIGURATION M.Table 24 — 4 to 20 mA Reset SUB-MODE KEYPAD ENTRY ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COOLING RESET TYPE DEGREES COOL RESET COMMENT 0 = no reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA input 2 = Outdoor air temp 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temperature Default: 0° F (0° C) Reset at 20 mA Range: –30 to 30 F (–16. (ConfigurationOPT1 RM.0 mA input. The variable RM.4 C) outdoor-air temperature and 15. The space temperature reset example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 72. The outdoor air reset example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 85. 0 F 10.Table 26A — Configuring Outdoor Air and Space Temperature Reset MODE (RED LED) KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER SUBMODE DISP UNIT OPT1 OPT2 HP.7 to 16.DEGREES RESET 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature 4 = Space Temperature (Connect to TB5-5.8 C) Range: 0° to 30 F COOLER T Default: 0 F (0 C) Range: –30 to 30°F (–16.NO* RT. 10.com manuals search engine .0 F 41 Downloaded from www.DG 2 85 °F 55 °F 15 °F 4 72 °F 68 °F 6 °F COOLING RESET TYPE REMOTE .A HP.NO RESET TEMP REMOTE .0 F (5.7 C) Range: 0° to125 F Default: 0.4 to -1.6) Default: 125.A KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM Outdoor Air Space ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT CONFIGURATION EXV.6) RETURN FLUID .B EXV.NO* RM.B M.MST RSET CRST RM.7 C) RSET ENTER CRST 3 RT.B EXV.DG *4 items skipped in this example.0 F (51.DEGREES RESET Default: 10.Manualslib.6 C) Range: 0° to10 F COOLER T Default: 0 F (–17.FULL RESET TEMP REMOTE .MST 0 = No Reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA Input (EMM required) (Connect to EMM TB6-2.1 °C) ENTER *4 items skipped in this example.FULL RESET TEMP RETURN .NO RESET TEMP RETURN FLUID .B M.7 C) Range: 0° to 125 F Default: 0° F (0° C) Range: –30 to 30 F (–34.F RT.0 F 0.3) COOLING RESET TYPE 2 = Outdoor-Air Temperature 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temperature (Connect to TB5-5.A HP.A ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER CONFIGURATION EXV.0° F (-17.F RM. Table 26B — Configuring Return Temperature Reset MODE (RED LED) KEYPAD KEYPAD SUB-MODE ENTRY ENTRY ENTER ITEM TEST TYPE FLUD CTRL DISPLAY ON/OFF X X X ITEM EXPANSION TEST DISPLAY LEDs UNIT TYPE COOLER FLUID CONTROL METHOD COMMENT DISP UNIT OPT1 OPT2 HP. the unit will limit capacity to the closest capacity stage. The control will reduce allowable capacity to this level for the 20 mA signal. Then configure the 2 Demand Limit Switch points (ConfigurationRSETDLS1) and (ConfigurationRSETDLS2) to the desired capacity limit. the fluid temperature set point may be colder than required. Connect the output from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal to terminal block TB6. EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to 20 mA Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA control set the Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 2. There are 3 types of demand limiting that can be configured. DEMAND LIMIT (2-Stage Switch Controlled) — To configure demand limit for 2-stage switch control set the Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 1. 20. 19 — Space Temperature Reset 42 Downloaded from www. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point (DLS1). A signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge signal generating device is used. LEGEND EWT LWT — Entering Water (Fluid) Temperature — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature Fig. the entering cooler fluid will change in proportion to the load as shown in Fig. 18 — Outdoor-Air Temperature Reset CAUTION Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufacturer’s control systems. the efficiency of the machine would increase. 20 — Standard Chilled Fluid Temperature Control — No Reset To use demand limit. The demand limit stage that is set to the lowest demand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. At part load. select the type of demand limiting to use. See Table 27 and Fig. NOTE: The 2-stage switch control and 4 to 20-mA input signal types of demand limiting require the energy management module (EMM). Refer to the unit wiring diagram for these connections to the optional/accessory energy management module and terminal block. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed module and has the ability to limit the current operating capacity to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required. the building load. which will reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percentages. To disable demand limit configure DMDC to 0. due to possible power supply differences. 6 and 7. full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. Demand Limit — Demand limit is a feature that allows the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy usage. LEGEND LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature Fig. Closing contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Limit Switch 2 set point. The two different power supplies cannot be mixed. Then configure the Demand Limit at 20 mA (ConfigurationRSETDM20) to the maximum loadshed value desired. If the demand limit percentage does not match unit staging. See Table 27. Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid temperature set point are selected based on a full-load condition. 21.Under normal operation. If the leaving fluid temperature was allowed to increase at part load. Capacity steps are controlled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to TB6 as shown in Fig. LEGEND LWT — Leaving Water (Fluid) Temperature Fig. See Table 27.Manualslib. Return temperature reset allows for the leaving temperature set point to be reset upward as a function of the return fluid temperature or. The first type is through 2-stage switch control. in effect. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level at a 20 mA input signal. closing the first stage demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand limit level. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the type selected. As the cooler load varies.com manuals search engine . terminals 1 and 5. ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. the chiller will maintain a constant leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled fluid set point. For demand limit by 2-stage switch control. 7 20 (FLUD = 2) MINIMUM SET POINT 14 F (-10 C) (FLUD = 1) MINIMUM SET POINT 38 F (3. externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal can be used to provide the leaving fluid temperature set point. The ComfortLink controls will respond to a Redline command from the Loadshed control.6 10.Manualslib.DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — To configure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control set the Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC) to 3.1 C) 4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO EMM EMM — Energy Management Module Fig.4) 30 (-1) 20 (-7) 10 (-12) 0 (-17) 4 6. Figure 22 shows how the 4 to 20 mA signal is linearly calculated on an overall 10 F to 80 F range for fluid types (ConfigurationOPT1FLUD) 1 or 2.–). See Table 27.20 mA INPUT 16 18 20 Fig. Be sure that the chilled water loop is protected at the lowest temperature. Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) — A field supplied 100 50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA MAX. See Table 27 for instructions to enable the function. Then configure the Loadshed Group Number (ConfigurationRSETSHNM).3 8. The control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no Cancel command has been received within the configured maximum loadshed time limit. and Maximum Loadshed Time (ConfigurationRSETSHTM). 22 — Cooling Set Point (4 to 20 mA) 43 Downloaded from www.8 (+. F (C) 60 (15) 50 (10) 40 (4. When the Redline command is received.3 C) MAXIMUM SET POINT 70 F (21.9 13.4 17. ALLOWABLE LOAD (%) 80 60 40 100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA 75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA 20 0 0 2 4 6 12 8 10 14 DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL – 4 . the current stage of capacity is set to the maximum stages available. Loadshed Demand Delta (ConfigurationRSETSHDL). The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN system designer. Should the loadshed control send a Loadshed command. the ComfortLink controls will reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed Demand delta. and generated. The Maximum Loadshed Time is the maximum length of time that a loadshed condition is allowed to exist.com manuals search engine . The set point will be limited by the fluid (FLUD) type. 21 — 4 to 20-mA Demand Limiting 100 (38) 90 (32) 80 (27) 70 (21) SET POINT.1 15. Connect the signal to LVT7. which indicates the maximum unloading for the digital compressor is 47%. Range: 0 to 120 min. and its range is continuous from the minimum configured capacity to 100%. DIGITAL SCROLL OPERATION — A digital scroll operates in two stages . a digital unloader solenoid (DUS) is used on the digital compressor. The capacity of the system is varied by varying the time the compressor operates in an unloaded and loaded state during a 15-second period. The ComfortLink controller controls and integrates the operation of the DUS into the compressor staging routine to maintain temperature control. complete Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chiller at end of this publication (pages CL-1 to CL-10). During the loaded state. Refer to unit wiring diagrams. air-handling equipment. Consult manufacturer's instructions. the compressor will be operating at 47% capacity. and provides a record of unit condition. There is also a maximum unload time configuration. the compressor operates like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity and mass flow. When a digital compressor is installed.MST RSET KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM TEST TYPE FLUD CTRL DISPLAY ON/OFF X X X ITEM EXPANSION Test Display LEDs Unit Type Cooler Fluid Control Method COMMENT ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER CRST X Cooling Reset Type Default: 0 0 = None 1 = Switch 2 = 4 to 20 mA Input 3 = CCN Loadshed Default: 100% Range: 0 to 100 Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99 Default: 0% Range: 0 to 60% Default: 60 min.A EXV.Table 27 — Configuring Demand Limit MODE CONFIGURATION KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER SUB-MODE DISP UNIT OPT1 OPT2 HP. If the DUS is energized for 10 seconds. and operation at initial start-up. system information.the "loaded state" when the solenoid valve is normally closed and the "unloaded state" when the solenoid valve is open. PRE-START-UP IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start-Up. the compressor always rotates with constant speed. The digital compressor is always installed in the A1 compressor location. the compressor will be operating at approximately 33% of its capacity. Regardless of capacity. such as chilled fluid pumps. an additional discharge gas temperature thermistor 44 Downloaded from www. This is done to optimize efficiency of the system. .T) that is set to 7 seconds. Check all auxiliary components.B EXV. If the unit If the unit has field-installed accessories. As the compressor transitions from a loaded to unloaded state. System Check 1. Capacity is the time averaged summation of loaded and unloaded states. the discharge and suction pressures will fluctuate and the compressor sound will change. there is no capacity and no mass flow through the compressor. the configuration parameter (ConfigurationUNITA1TY) is configured to YES.B M.A HP.Manualslib.com manuals search engine (DTT) is installed along with the AUX board for control of the DUS. during the unloaded state. XXX % XXX XXX% XXX MIN XXX % XXX % Demand Limit at 20 mA Loadshed Group Number Loadshed Demand Delta Maximum Loadshed Time Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 Digital Scroll Option — The 30RAP units have a factory-installed option for a digital scroll compressor which provides additional stages of unloading for the unit. If the DUS is energized for 7 seconds. DIGITAL COMPRESSOR CONFIGURATION — When a digital compressor is installed. Verify that any pump interlock contacts have been properly installed. When a digital compressor is installed. The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit. Default: 80% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 50% Range: 0 to 100% DMDC* X Demand Limit Select DM20 SHNM SHDL SHTM DLS1 DLS2 *Seven items skipped in this example. However. Do not attempt to start the chiller until following checks have been completed. application requirements. be sure all are properly installed and wired correctly. (ConfigurationUNITMAX. or other equipment to which the chiller supplies liquid. Recheck compressor oil level (see Oil Charge section). Block condenser airflow as required to reach this temperature range. Bleed all air out of the high points of the system. the system must be dehydrated. Using the scrolling marquee display.com manuals search engine . Check Refrigerant Charge — All 30RAP units are OIL SIGHTGLASS Fig.4 amps for 460 and 575 v units.4 C) or outdoor temperatures are expected to be below 32 F (0° C). 2. operate circuit at full load and use an accurate temperature sensor on the liquid line as it enters the EXV.4 10.1) or (Set PointsCOOLCSP. or the brine freezing point if the unit is a medium temperature brine unit. Heaters operate at the same voltage as the main incoming power supply and are single phase.A or SCT. If complete charging is required.3 3. If chilled water is to be maintained at a temperature below 40 F (4.8 17. set leaving-fluid set point (Set PointsCOOLCSP.9 5. a30-4978 START-UP AND OPERATION NOTE: Refer to Start-Up Checklist on pages CL-1 to CL-10. 23 — Sight Glass Location Table 28 — Minimum Cooler Flow Rates and Minimum Loop Volume 30RAP SIZE 010 015 018 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 MINIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE (gpm) 13 17 20 23 28 33 41 47 53 57 63 68 MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE (gpm) 50 66 78 91 112 133 164 186 209 228 251 270 MINIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE (l/s) 0.1 1.7 7.1 2. See Table 28. 6. If partial charging is required.6 3. Check tightness of all electrical connections. 6.B minus liquid line temperature entering EXV) is approximately 15 to 17 F (–9. Schraeder connection on the liquid line. Add refrigerant until the system subcooling (SCT. 3.3 1. 3. 5. Check the cooler leaving chilled water temperature to see that it remains well above 32 F (0° C).5 1. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to ENABLE position. All condenser fan and factory installed hydronic package pump motors are three phase.2). Check for proper rotation of condenser fans first BEFORE attempting to start pumps or compressors. Fill chilled fluid circuit with clean water (with recommended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to be cooled. 7. After leaks are repaired.B).0 3. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate. All refrigerant charging should be done through the ¼-in. Refrigerant VAPOR only may be added to a circuit through the 1/4-in. suction Schraeder connection on the suction line. 5. Heater current is approximately 0. If unit is a brine unit. a brine of sufficient concentration must be used to prevent freeze-up at anticipated suction temperatures.4 to –8. Actual Start-Up — Actual start-up should be done only under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic. Do NOT add refrigerant charge through the low-pressure side of the system.A) or (TemperaturesCIR.3 11. Adjust the oil level as required.8 amps for 230 v units. check to ensure proper brine concentration is used to prevent freezing. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is functioning properly. Be sure all service valves are open.4 15. An acceptable oil level in the compressors is from 1/8 to 3/8 of sight glass. Be sure system is fully charged with refrigerant (see Check Refrigerant Charge section on this page). 1. To reverse rotation. 23. Use the Temperatures mode on the scrolling marquee display to show the circuit saturated condensing temperature (TemperaturesCIR. 10.1). 9.3 MAXIMUM COOLER FLOW RATE (l/s) 3.B SCT. shipped with a complete operating charge of R-410A and should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test after installation.0 4. Verify proper operation of cooler and hydronic package heaters (if installed). 7.3 C).8 2. If there is no system pressure. Heater current is approximately 0.2 4.6 4. See Fig. Oil should be visible in the compressor sightglass(es). See Oil Charge section on page 50 for Carrier approved oils.0 45 Downloaded from www.1 8. Check to see that leaving fluid temperature agrees with leaving set point (Set PointsCOOL CSP. admit nitrogen until a pressure is observed and then proceed to test for leaks. 8. weigh in the appropriate charge for the circuit as shown on the unit nameplate. 4.2 14.2.ASCT. Use the scrolling marquee display to adjust the Cooling Set Point.7 13. or if reset is used.2 4. Charging is most accurate at saturated discharge temperatures of 120 to 125 F (49 to 52 C).8 1. No cooling range adjustment is necessary. Start chilled fluid pump (if not configured for cooler pump control). interchange any two of the main incoming power leads. with the control point (Run StatusVIEW CTPT).Manualslib. 4. or below 15 F (–9. Overcharging results in higher discharge pressure. Operating Limitations TEMPERATURES (See Table 29 for 30RAP standard temperature limits).4 C) for the standard units. the LCWT must be no lower than 40 F (4.4 035-060 F C 120 32 95 70 40 49 0 35 21 4.Manualslib. Determine percent voltage imbalance: % Voltage Imbalance = 100 x = 1. LOW-AMBIENT OPERATION — If operating temperatures below 45 F (7 C) on size 018-030 units. Contact your Carrier representative for applicable LCWT range for standard water-cooled chiller in a specific application. Table 29 — Temperature Limits for Standard 30RAP Units UNIT SIZE 30RA Temperature Maximum Ambient Temperature Minimum Ambient Temperature Maximum Cooler EWT* Maximum Cooler LWT Minimum Cooler LWT† LEGEND EWT — Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature = 239 2. Refer to separate installation instructions for operation using this accessory. If the ambient temperature drops below 40 F (4.CAUTION Never charge liquid into low-pressure side of system. †Unit requires modification below this temperature.4 C). Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60. the control monitors the outdoor air temperature. OPERATION SEQUENCE During unit off cycle. Field wiring connections are made to the LVT.com manuals search engine . EWT should not exceed 85 F (29. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition is corrected. the unit stages up in capacity to maintain the leaving fluid set point.4 C) for units factory built for medium temperature brine. Low Cooler LCWT — For standard units. The unit is started by putting the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch in the ENABLE or REMOTE CONTACT position. If the unit is the factory-installed optional medium temperature brine unit. Do not overcharge. Contact your Carrier representative for details. 4 239 010-030 F C 120 45 95 70 40 49 7 35 21 4. Operating temperatures can go as low as –20 F (–29 C) on size 010 and 015 units. the unit expansion valve will limit suction pressure to approximately 90 psig (620 kPa) to avoid overloading the compressor.4 C). To determine percent voltage imbalance: max voltage deviation from avg voltage % Voltage Imbalance = 100 x average voltage The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average across all 3 legs.4 C). Determine average voltage: Average voltage = = 243 + 236 + 238 3 717 3 CAUTION Do not operate with cooler leaving chiller water (fluid) temperature (LCWT) below 40 F (4.7% This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the maximum allowable of 2%. AB = 243 v BC = 236 v AC = 238 v 1. The lead circuit can be specifically designated on all models or selected based on compressor run hours and starts depending on field configuration. VOLTAGE — ALL UNITS Main Power Supply — Minimum and maximum acceptable supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions. accessory Motormaster® V control must be installed. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage: (AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v (BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v (AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v Maximum deviation is 4 v.4 C] LCWT) for chiller normally requires factory modification. In general. Downloaded from www. these heaters are also energized. If power is maintained to the chiller and the EMERGENCY ON/OFF switch is left in the OFF position. Control Circuit Power — Power for the control circuit is supplied from the main incoming power through a factoryinstalled control power transformer (TRAN1) for all models. The first compressor starts 11/2 to 3 minutes after the call for cooling. possible compressor damage. on dual compressor 46 CAUTION Brine duty application (below 40 F [4. cooler and hydronic system heaters (if either are factory installed) are energized.4 C). the cooler LCWT can go down to 15 F (–9. 3. Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%. The unit control will override this selection under certain starting conditions to properly maintain oil return to the compressors. contact your local electric utility company immediately. and higher power consumption. High Cooler Leaving Chilled Water (Fluid) Temperatures (LCWT) — During start-up with cooler LCWT above approximately 60 F (16 C). IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is more than 2%. During charging or removal of refrigerant.4 *For sustained operation. When the unit receives a call for cooling (either from the internal control or CCN network command or remote contact closure). as standard. Installation of wind baffles is also required. be sure water is continuously circulating through the cooler to prevent freezing. and 32 F (0° C) on size 035-060 units are expected. if temperature reset is being used. Each circuit has a thermistor located in a well in the suction manifold before the compressor. Access to the compressors is through latched panels from beneath the control box on all models or from opposite the coil side (sizes 010-030 only). press ENTER . Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test mode. select 0% with and press ENTER . the unit controls to a higher leaving-fluid temperature as the building load reduces. See Table 30 for number of steps. Just prior to compressor start. The EXV board controls the valve. After initialization period. Switch the EOR switch to Enable. the control will most often start the A1 or B1 compressor first. the upper center latched door on sizes 035-060 gives access to the controls. Press ESCAPE on the Navigator™ display until ‘Select a menu item’ appears on the display. pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase condition (liquid and vapor). For size 010-030 units. For all units. Move the pointer to item EXV. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed. The actuator should knock when it reaches the bottom of its stroke. Connect positive test lead to red wire (EXV-J6 terminal 3 for Circuit A. See the EXV Troubleshooting Procedure section to test EXVs. The unit is then protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. Table 30 — EXV Steps UNIT SIZE 30RAP 010-020 025. Use to select 100% valve position (hold for quick movement) and press ENTER . the unit may temporarily be unable to maintain the desired leaving-fluid temperature because of imposed power limitations. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pressure transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature. EXV-J7 terminal 3 for Circuit B). This makes it possible for the chiller to start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the compressor. Commanding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add extra steps to the move.Manualslib. 24 for a cutaway view of the EXV. A hard knocking should be felt from the actuator when it reaches the top of its stroke (can be heard if surroundings are relatively quiet). Press ENTER again twice if necessary to confirm this. Electronic Components CONTROL COMPONENTS — Unit uses an advanced electronic control system that normally does not require service. it is possible to track the valve position. High-pressure liquid refrigerant enters valve through the top. The electronic expansion valve operates through an electronically controlled activation of a stepper motor. The front door(s) provide access to the compressor(s) and all components of the refrigeration system. Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) — See Fig. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin 3 to any other pin as board damage will occur. The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approximately 9° F (5° C). to ensure the value is open or closed completely. The Service Test mode is now enabled. The valve includes a positive shut-off when closed.B as needed. The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction temperature to 50 F (10 C). unless power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator windings for rotation in either direction. 25). SERVICE WARNING Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Move the pointer down to the OUTS sub-mode and press ENTER . If it appears that the EXV module is not properly controlling circuit operation to maintain correct superheat. There are two different EXVs. The EXV board controls the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper motor to maintain superheat set point.A or EXV. To close the valve. especially after long off periods. Shut off all power to this equipment during service. Press ENTER and the valve position will flash. Check EXV motor operation first. The thermistor measures the temperature of the superheated gas entering the compressor and the pressure transducer 47 Downloaded from www.circuits. At ambient temperatures above 110 F. Using the Service Test procedure above. The display will be: > TEST OFF OUTS COMP Press ENTER (password entry may be required) and use to change ‘OFF’ to ‘ON’. move the valve output under test to 100%. MOP is bypassed at start-up to prevent charge backup in the condenser. The stepper motor stays in position. Switch the Enable/Off/ Remote Contact (EOR) switch to the Off position.030 035-045 050-060 EXV STEPS 1596 2500 1596 2500 EXV Troubleshooting Procedure — Follow steps below to diagnose and correct EXV/economizer problems. Similarly. At low ambient temperatures the EXV is closed at start up. The direction depends on the phase relationship of the power pulses. the EXV will open. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maximum operating pressure). The technician should be able to feel the actuator moving by placing a hand on the EXV. The difference between the temperature of the superheated gas and the saturated suction temperature is the superheat. The EXV motor moves at 200 steps per second. determines the saturated temperature of suction gas. The motor directly operates the spindle. there are a number of checks that can be made using test functions and initialization features built into the microprocessor control. If demand limit is used. continue with the checkout procedure below: Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on the EXV module (see Fig. If it is believed that the valve is not working properly. As refrigerant passes through the orifice. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Set meter to approximately 20 vdc.com manuals search engine . access to the controls is through the upper latched outer door above the compressor access door. The MBB controls fan stages to maintain the head pressure set point and will automatically adjust unit capacity as required to keep compressors from operating outside of the specified envelope. Inner panels are secured in place and should not be removed unless all power to the chiller is off. Press ENTER . valve position is tracked by the EXV board by constantly monitoring the amount of valve movement. Because EXV status is communicated to the main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV boards. There are no pumpout or pumpdown sequences on these chillers. For details on controls refer to Operating Data section. A sight glass is located on the valve body to verify that the sleeve is moving to expose/cover slots in the orifice. which has rotating movements that are transformed into linear motion by the transmission in the cage assembly. Make sure they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV driver and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed. To remove the valve from the system. Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings.com manuals search engine FIELD SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS — The EXV valves on sizes 025. Remove the EXV module plug (J6 for Circuit A. check the resistance of each motor phase. The output of the controller to the valve can be tested with the following procedure: a. 48 Downloaded from www. perform the following procedure: 1. however. Disconnect supply voltage to the controller. Disconnect the line voltage to the valve controller.4 and 5 in succession (plug J6 for Circuit A. J7 for Circuit B) and check the resistance of the two windings between pins 1 and 2 for one winding and pins 4 and 5 for the other winding (see Fig. Check the EXV terminal strip and interconnecting wiring. The EXV valves on all other sizes are hermetic and cannot be disassembled for installation or during service.INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT CABLE CABLE CABLE RETAINER MOTOR ADAPTER ASSEMBLY MOTOR AND ADAPTER ASSEMBLY CABLE RETAINER GASKET MOTOR ADAPTER ASSEMBLY SIGHTGLASS SPORLAN FLOW DIRECTION NORMAL FLOW DIRECTION a30-4971 Fig. Resistance between black and white leads or between the red and green leads should be approximately 100 ohms. plug J7 for Circuit B). 25). 2. Press ENTER and select 0% to close the valve. the expansion valve and EXV wiring should be checked. carefully connect the negative test lead to pins 1. If the reading is correct. Check the 4 position DIP switch on the board (all switches should be set to On). 4. Motor kits for the EXV valve are available as replacement parts. the cable and retainer may be replaced if necessary. or any lead and piping. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin terminals. If a problem still exists. The resistance should be 100 ohms ± 10 ohms. Any resistance reading will indicate a shorted winding and the valve will need to be replaced. replace the EXV module. 3. 24 — Electronic Expansion Valve Details During the next several seconds. Resistance between black and red. 2. 050-060 can be serviced. Be sure the refrigerant has been recovered from the circuit. remove the connector to the valve and recheck.2. . If it remains constant at a voltage other than 6 VDC or shows 0 volts.Manualslib. Digital voltmeters will average this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If the motor fails to operate properly. Check color coding and wire connections. should be infinite or “open”. Disconnect the valve wires from the controller. 030. Differences of more than 10% between phases indicate a defective motor. 3. 1. Care should be taken to ensure engagement of the alignment key.-lb (2. The compressors are bolted to rails. 5. reconnect compressor suction and discharge lines. Restore power to the controller. the controller should be initialized at least twice. replace all of the compressor mounting grommets. valve position as calculated by the controller will be lost.7.-lb (1. Make sure the depths of the replacement and original cooler heat exchangers are the same. Reapply power to the ComfortLink™ controller. One eighth turn more than hand tight is sufficient to achieve a leak proof seal on knife-edge joints. reinstall the mounting bolts and washers through the compressor feet. Remove the cable from the compressor junction box. Using hardware saved. 26 and 27. the cable should be replaced on the valve. 4. (See Table 31. 25 — EXV Cable Connections to EXV Module b. the voltmeter should read approximately 12 to 14 volts. Use Service Test to open the EXV to 100%. d. For at least 7 seconds. To replace a brazed-plate heat exchanger: 1.6 to 2. from one to four compressors. on 20-volt AC scale. then the wiring may be damaged or the valve may be plugged with debris or otherwise obstructed. Replacement motor assemblies are shipped in the retracted position and may be installed as received. VALVE REPLACEMENT — The valve may be replaced by unsoldering or cutting the piping. and gasket or knife-edge on the new motor adaptor. Remove high-pressure switch and pressure transducer(s) if required for compressor removal. Place a digital voltmeter.to 3. Lightly oil the threads. 2. 030. Lifting one side of the compressor at a time. c. If a leak (refrigerant or water) develops. Pressurize the system and check for leaks. Remove the junction box cover bolts and disconnect the compressor power and ground connections.0 N-m) Cooler BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER REPLACEMENT — Brazed-plate heat exchangers cannot be repaired if they develop a leak. Since. cycling power to the controller will accomplish this. Save the mounting hardware for use with the new compressor. Following the installation of the new compressor.CAUTION BLK WHT GRN RED If the existing motor has been removed for inspection or cleaning. Failure to do so will permanently damage the drive and motor. Lift one corner of the compressor at a time and remove all the rubber mounting grommets (single compressor circuits) or steel spacers (dual compressor circuits). Compressor Replacement (Refer to Fig. across the black and white terminals on the controller. 26 and 27) — All models contain scroll compressors and have BLK WHT GRN RED a30-4972 Fig. A tubing cutter must be used to prevent creating contaminants in the piping. Remove the 4 bolts holding the compressor to the rail on the basepan. Carefully seat the adaptor on the valve body or engage and tighten the lock nut if used. Lock nuts should be torqued to approximately 45 ft-lb. The EXV valves on sizes 025. Remove power from the valve or controller. The size 010-030 units are a single refrigeration circuit while sizes 035-060 are dual circuit.Manualslib. In some instances. Slide the new compressor in place on the basepan.) Table 31 — Unit Torque Specification FASTENER Compressor Mounting Bolts Compressor Power Connections Compressor Ground Terminal Connections RECOMMENDED TORQUE 7 to 10 ft-lb (9. tighten all hardware to the following specifications.2 N-m) 14 to 18 in. 050-060 may be disassembled for cleaning. Knock the same holes out of the new compressor junction box and install the cable connectors from the old compressor. Check that the replacement heat exchanger is the same as the original heat exchanger. Using proper techniques. 3. which are in turn bolted to the unit basepan for all sizes except 010 and 015 which are directly bolted to the basepan. braze suction and discharge lines and check for leaks. This will retract the white polyester driver/piston fully into the driver guide. Using new tubing as required.5 N-m) 24 to 28 in.com manuals search engine . be sure that the piston is fully retracted into the motor assembly before installation on the valve. A compressor is most easily removed from the front of the unit. Remove the connections from the high-pressure switch.5 to 13. Repeat the procedure in Step b above using the red and green terminals on the controller. If the controller responds properly. depending on where clearance space was allowed during unit installation. Reconnect oil equalization line on dual compressor circuit models. After the motor is tightened. Refer to Fig. inspection or motor assembly replacement. Reconnect the compressor power connections and highpressure switch wiring as on the old compressor. during service. the heat exchanger must be replaced. Significant differences mean the controller is defective or not properly configured for the EXV valve. Carefully cut the compressor suction and discharge lines with a tubing cutter as close to the compressor as feasible. VALVE REASSEMBLY — Perform the following procedure to reassemble the EXV valve: 1. 49 Downloaded from www. Snap on the cable retainer. Remove the old compressor from the unit. The unit insulation covers the manufacturer’s part number. Carefully braze the refrigerant lines to the connections on the heat exchanger. Recommended oil level adjustment method is as follows: ADD OIL — Recover charge from the unit. . . . and must be in contact with liquid refrigerant. . . . Reconnect the water/brine lines. changes the color of the indicator as follows: Green (safe) —Moisture is below 75 ppm Yellow-Green (caution) — 75 to 150 ppm Yellow (wet) — above 150 ppm The unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before the moisture indicator gives an accurate reading. . The following steps should be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils: 1. . waterproof clothing and gloves. Braze the liquid lines with a heat sink around the expansion valve to protect it from excess heat. . MOISTURE-LIQUID INDICATOR — The indicator is located immediately ahead of the TXV to provide an indication of the refrigerant moisture content. the entire filter drier must be replaced. Run all compressors for 20 minutes then shut off 8 to check oil level. . . . Failure to do so could result in possible equipment damage. (See Fig. . Oil should be visible in compressor oil sight glass. . . An acceptable oil level is from 1/8 to 3/ of sight glass. Repeat procedure until acceptable oil level is present.EAL Arctic 32-3MA Uniqema . .com manuals search engine Check Refrigerant Feed Components FILTER DRIER — The function of the filter drier is to maintain a clean. Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. .) When oil can be seen at the bottom of the sight glass. . Take all necessary precautions to avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere. . . . . . . . 8. 4. . . . 4. . Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations CAUTION Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser coils. . . For sizes 030-060. CAUTION Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between air centers and refrigerant tubes. or if the heat exchanger is cleaned frequently. . . This is extremely hygroscopic.2. depending on condition of the chiller water/brine. . At the first sign of moisture in the system. . from the core face. NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have one indicator per circuit. . Disconnect the liquid-in and liquid-out connections at the heat exchanger. It also provides a sight glass for refrigerant liquid. POE oils can absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Oil Charge CAUTION The compressor in a Puron® refigerant (R-410A) system uses a polyol ester (POE) oil. The factory-installed strainer screen in front of the water/ brine inlets of the heat exchangers should be cleaned periodically. . 6. A professional cleaning service skilled in chemical cleaning should be used. . . The filter drier is a sealed-type drier. . Bubbles in the sight glass (at full unit loading) indicate an undercharged system or the presence of noncondensables. torque the bolts to 7-10 ft-lb. meaning it absorbs water readily. . 5% oxalic acid). NOTE: Dual circuit (035-060 sizes) units have 1 filter drier per circuit. . Only clean. . . . BRAZED-PLATE COOLER HEAT EXCHANGER CLEANING — Brazed-plate heat exchangers must be cleaned chemically. . . Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condenser coils. . Remove the old heat exchanger. . . . 3. . . Puron refrigerant systems use a polyol ester (POE) oil. Moisture in the system. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 degree angle. . Recover the refrigerant from the system. RL32-3MAF Do not reuse oil that has been drained out. Install the replacement heat exchanger in the unit and attach the mounting bracket hardware to the fan uprights (sizes 010-030) or to the bottom bracket (sizes 035-060) using the hardware removed in Step 4. . torque the bolts to 30-50 ft-lb. Elimination of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage the coil. . Dehydrate and recharge the unit. 2. Mobil . NOTE: Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. 7. 26 and 27. Check for leaks. All compressors must be off when checking 8 oil level. . It also includes a cooler heater. The replacement heat exchanger is supplied fully insulated. Cleaning materials must be disposed of properly. Use only Carrier approved compressor oil. . . . Use of the heater is not required unless the original cooler contained a factory installed heater. . and unsolder the refrigerant-in and refrigerant-out connections. . Approved sources are: Totaline . 3. After cleaning. . preferably in a backflush mode. For sizes 010-025.Manualslib. . . The moisture indicator (described below) indicates any need to change the filter drier. . Keep the temperature below 1472 F (800 C) under normal soldering conditions (no vacuum) to prevent the copper solder of the brazed plate heat exchanger from changing its structure. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray straight toward the core. . 5. Clear flow of liquid refrigerant (at full unit loading) indicates sufficient charge in the system. add oil in 5 oz increments which is approximately 1/ in oil level. Reconnect the cooler heater if required. . . Use a weak acid (5% phosphoric acid. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. . Lines should be soldered using silver as the soldering material with a minimum of 45% silver. Put on personal protective equipment including safetyglasses and/or face shield. P903-1601 50 Downloaded from www. . When the drier needs to be changed. Add oil to suction line Schrader valve on tandem compressors sets and the compressor Schrader on the trio's and single compressor circuits. . 3MAF POE. . or oil that has been exposed to atmosphere. . dry system. . Pump the cleaning solution through the exchanger. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and brackets. rinse with large amounts of fresh water to dispose of all the acid. Failure to do so can result in internal or external leakage at the connections which cannot be repaired. . measured in parts per million (ppm). It is recommended to use full coverage clothing. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent damage to air centers. change the corresponding filter drier. potable water is authorized for cleaning condenser coils. . Manualslib.com manuals search engine . 26 AND 27 Discharge Pressure Thermostat Discharge Temperature Thermistor Entering Water Thermistor High Pressure Switch Leaving Water Thermistor Return Gas Thermistor Suction Pressure Transducer 51 Downloaded from www. 26 — Compressor Location — 30RAP010-030 SUCTION RGT SPT ACCESS VALVE SPT RGT DPT DISCHARGE ACCESS VALVE HPS a30-4974 EWT DTT A1 A2 B1 B2 OIL SIGHTGLASS DISCHARGE ACCESS VALVE LWT DPT HPS FLOW SWITCH Fig. 27 — Compressor Location — 30RAP035-060 DPT DTT EWT HPS LWT RGT SPT — — — — — — — LEGEND FOR FIG.DPT HPS SUCTION ACCESS VALVE EWT SPT RGT COMPRESSOR A2 LWT DTT COMPRESSOR A1 FLOW SWITCH a30-4973 Fig. Thermistors — Electronic control uses up to five 5 k thermistors to sense temperatures used to control operation of the chiller. See Fig. The SPT space temperature thermistor has a 10 k input channel and it has a different set of temperature vs. The MBB shuts down the unit when a low pressure condition exists that could cause the cooler to freeze up.Manualslib. The DTT is an 86 k thermistor. Drain the fluid from the cooler. when installed. If an unsafe. Using the voltage reading obtained. If power to the unit must be off for a prolonged period. 3. freeze-up protection is required using inhibited ethylene or propylene glycol. Power for these heaters is supplied from the main unit power. Add glycol according to Winter Shutdown Step 2 below.6 L) of inhibited propylene glycol or other suitable inhibited antifreeze solution to prevent any residual water in the cooler and hydronic package/piping from freezing. In some cases. REPLACING THERMISTORS (EWT. 3. 2. For all probes. 1. the unit may not be able to run at full capacity. hydronic package (if installed) and internal piping. WINTER SHUTDOWN — At the end of the cooling season: 1. HEATER CABLE — Optional factory-installed cooler and/or hydronic package heaters are cycled based on the input from the outside-air temperature sensor. but to also maintain operation of the chiller within the compressor manufacturer's specified limits. THERMISTOR/TEMPERATURE SENSOR CHECK — A high quality digital volt-ohmmeter is required to perform this check.4 C). LWT. a DTT (digital temperature thermistor) is used. Thermistors EWT. See Table 32 for highpressure switch settings. These inputs to the MBB are not only used to monitor the status of the unit.MINIMUM LOAD VALVE — On units equipped with the factory-installed capacity reduction option. If a more accurate check is required. The main base board (MBB) monitors leaving fluid temperature at all times. a dual chiller sensor is required which is a 5 k thermistor. The compressors have either a single circuit breaker or multiple circuit breakers which can be used to shut off power to the compressors. a solenoid valve and discharge bypass valve (minimum load valve) are located between the discharge line and the cooler entering-refrigerant line. the anti-freeze solution must be properly mixed to prevent freezing at a temperature of at least 15 F (8. and OAT are identical in their temperature and voltage drop performance. Failure to provide the proper antifreeze solution mixture is considered abuse and may impair or otherwise negatively impact the Carrier warranty. Temperature measured by thermocouple and temperature determined from thermistor voltage reading should be close. When a digital compressor is used. resistance and voltage drop performance. 2. 29). measure temperature at probe location with an accurate thermocouple-type temperature measuring instrument. The amount of capacity reduction achieved by the minimum load valve is not adjustable. Fill the cooler and hydronic package with at least 2 gallons (7. Table 32 — Factory Settings. High-Pressure Switch (Fixed) UNIT 30RA CUTOUT Psig kPa 650 4482 CUT-IN Psig 500 kPa 3447 Clear the alarm using the scrolling marquee display as described on page 63. Check Unit Safeties HIGH-PRESSURE SWITCH — A high-pressure switch is provided to protect each compressor and refrigeration system from unsafe high pressure conditions. The MBB cycles the solenoid to perform minimum load valve function and the discharge bypass valve modulates to the suction pressure set point and the valve. tighten the retaining nut ¼ turn past finger tight. At the beginning of the next cooling season. Connect the digital voltmeter across the appropriate themistor terminals at the J8 terminal strip on the Main Base Board (see Fig. The MBB prevents the circuit from restarting until the alert condition is reset. The total unit capacity with the minimum load valve is shown in Table 19. RGTA. are designed to protect the cooler and/or hydronic package from freezing down to –20 F (–29 C).com manuals search engine . expires. unit must be shut down and thermistor removed and checked at a known temperature (freezing point or boiling point of water) using either voltage drop measured across thermistor at the J8 terminal. built into the unit control module. hydronic package (if installed) and internal piping. The CSB senses the compressor feedback signal and generates an appropriate alarm. The unit should restart after the compressor anti-short-cycle delay. RGT) — Add a small amount of thermal conductive grease to the thermistor well and end of probe. Resistance at various temperatures are listed in Tables 33-37. The switch should open at the pressure corresponding to the appropriate switch setting as shown in Table 32. COOLER FREEZE-UP PROTECTION WARNING On medium temperature brine units. the switch opens and shuts off the affected circuit. read the sensor temperature from Tables 33-37. refill the cooler and add the recommended inhibitor. The control module will automatically reduce the capacity of a circuit as needed to maintain specified maximum/minimum operating pressures. PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS — Each refrigerant circuit is equipped with a suction and discharge pressure transducer. high-pressure condition should exist. PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES — All units have one pressure relief device per circuit located in the liquid line which relieves at 210 F (100 C). Insulate thermocouple to avoid ambient temperatures from influencing reading. The input to the MBB from the suction pressure transducer is also used to protect the compressor from operating at low pressure conditions and low superheat conditions. For dual chiller operation. The input from the low pressure transducer provides a backup cooler freeze protection package. The high-pressure switch is mounted in the discharge line of each circuit. 28. These heaters. When the cooler is exposed to lower ambient temperatures (34 F [1° C] or below). LWT. by determining the resistance with chiller shut down and thermistor 52 Downloaded from www. To check thermistor accuracy. CAUTION Do not disconnect main unit power when servicing compressor(s) if ambient temperature is below 40 F (4. The MBB will rapidly remove stages of capacity as necessary to prevent freezing conditions due to the rapid loss of load or low cooler fluid flow. drain the cooler.3 C) below the leaving-fluid temperature set point. RGTB. ± 5° F (3° C) if care was taken in applying thermocouple and taking readings. (8 mm) below top of orifice on the fan deck to top of the fan hub. Condenser Fans — Each fan is supported by a formed 1/4-18 NPT 6" MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR THERMISTOR REMOVAL Fig. For factory-installed hydronic systems.. TROUBLESHOOTING — If a transducer is suspected of being faulty. The difference in temperature between the two thermistors provides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe. 29 for transducer connections to the J8 connector on the MBB. IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (clockwise when viewed from above). replace the pressure transducer. 5. follow the steps below to correct the situation: 1. If the two readings are not reasonably close.32 in. As the fluid starts to flow.5 ft/sec of flow. METAL FANS — The exposed end of fan motor shaft is protected from weather by grease and a rubber boot.9 kPa). • Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set. verify that: • All air has been purged from the system. As fluid velocity decreases. Pressure drop across strainer in excess of 3 psi (21 kPa) indicates the need for cleaning. build-up (e. check the sensor tip for build-up every 6 months. first check supply voltage to the transducer. 3. In order to sense flow. See Fig. If supply voltage is correct. The flow sensor cable is provided with (3) LEDs that indicate if 24 vac power is present and also status of the switch contacts. Strainer — Periodic factory-installed strainer cleaning is required. more heat will be carried away from the heated thermistor and the temperature differential will be small. When fluid velocity is high.T. enter ‘YES’ for Strainer Maintenance Done (Run StatusPMS. be sure to regrease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. Supply voltage should be 5 vdc ± 0. then the output is switched on. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler or cooler/ pump system and compare this to the system requirements. Use the blow-down valve provided or remove the screen and clean it. Compare the values determined with the value read by the control in the Temperatures mode using the scrolling marquee display.2 v. Open the factoryinstalled blowdown valve to clean the strainer. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the terminal block are secure.disconnected from J8.3 N-m).Manualslib. If necessary. For recommended maintenance. Wrong pump motor rotation. 4. This thermistor is used to detect changes in the flow velocity of the liquid. The sensor tip houses two thermistors and a heater element. 6. The thermistors are positioned to be in close contact with the wall of the sensor probe and. For proper performance with the value sound fan option. Pump must rotate clockwise when viewed from motor end of pump. This is a thermal-dispersion flow switch with no field adjustments. HEX necessary. less heat will be taken from the heated thermistor and there will be an increase in temperature differential. 28 — Thermistor Well 53 Downloaded from www. Units with the optional hydronic package have the flow switch installed in the entering fluid piping. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not providing sufficient flow. suction (yellow) and discharge (red). wire mount bolted to a fan deck and covered with a wire guard. See Fig.com manuals search engine . Cooling of the first thermistor is a function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing liquid. ensure that the minimum speed setting has not been changed. For the case of VFD controlled pumps. which is generated by the main base board (MBB). it is necessary to heat one of the thermistors in the probe. If 5/8 in. If required. Normal (clean) pressure drop is approximately 1 psi (6. (See Fig. The second thermistor is bonded to the cylindrical wall and is affected only by changes in the temperature of the liquid. closest to the flowing fluid. Pressure readings should be within ± 15 psig. The LEDs are as follows: • Green LED ON – 24 vac present • One Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch OPEN • Two Yellow LED ON – Flow sensor switch CLOSED If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring. When strainer has been cleaned. The switch is set for approximately 0. Pressure Transducers — The suction and discharge transducers are different part numbers and can be distinguished by the color of the transducer body. No pressure transducer calibration is required. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. Check to confirm that the factory installed strainer is clean. heat will be carried away from the sensor tip. The transducers operate on a 5 vdc supply. at the same time.) Tighten set screws to 15 ± 1 ft-lb (20 ± 1. 30. compare pressure reading displayed on the scrolling marquee display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure gauge. sending 24 vac to the MBB to prove flow has been established. the tip of the probe is heated. When power is applied. switch any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation. shut the chiller down and remove the strainer screen to clean.MN). fan web should be 0. to be kept separated from each other within the confines of the probe. When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate. lime) can be removed with a common vinegar cleansing agent. 31. 2.g. Chilled Water Flow Switch — A factory-installed flow switch is installed in the leaving fluid piping for all units without the factory-installed hydronic package. One thermistor is located in the sensor tip. If fan motor must be removed for service or replacement. 489 1.903 0.103 3.247 0.723 0.053 11.291 8.905 1.609 1.854 1.937 1.898 2.361 1.205 3.404 1.016 2.516 1.550 1.346 15.577 0.679 3.454 2.158 0.808 2.402 3.493 1.629 0. LWT.403 4.480 2.339 40.505 44.140 0.298 1.197 0.470 1.550 3.934 0.773 2.133 61.com manuals search engine .801 0.202 30.318 1.350 0.112 10.627 79.558 2.739 8.231 33.784 2.339 0.282 0.213 0.163 0.748 0.699 3.468 7.018 1.750 1.408 0.950 0.217 0.319 1.911 6.597 2.930 1.340 1.999 0.730 12.879 1.203 0.426 1.511 0.291 1.453 0.597 0.257 1.401 1.268 0.636 3.327 0.214 TEMP (F) 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.369 0.182 0. and OAT) TEMP (F) –25 –24 –23 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –17 –16 –15 –14 –13 –12 –11 –10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 3.070 59.686 7.066 42.238 6.196 4.520 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 7.453 15.393 18.624 26.333 0.563 3.729 1.438 0.547 19.903 2.436 2.311 0.735 0.029 1.034 2.138 0.816 10. RGT.461 0.124 3.244 2.526 51.361 5.007 986 965 945 925 906 887 868 850 832 815 798 782 765 750 734 719 705 690 677 663 650 638 626 614 602 591 581 570 561 551 542 533 524 516 508 501 494 487 480 473 467 461 456 450 445 439 434 429 424 419 415 410 405 401 396 391 386 382 377 372 367 361 356 350 344 338 332 325 318 311 304 297 289 282 54 Downloaded from www.624 3.494 3.011 25.858 0.996 45.239 0.317 0.587 0.860 1.101 4.994 2.277 0.260 29.179 1.796 17.640 0.176 31.856 2.651 0.618 0.212 74.235 0.345 1.430 1.918 0.099 3.814 16.826 13.477 0.972 2.445 0.220 0.060 3.576 3.381 0.614 1.033 1.Manualslib.529 10.096 22.165 1.710 2.519 1.511 4.352 3.135 0.488 2.000 3.200 0.548 0.532 2.255 0.685 2.596 36.976 4.511 8.829 1.323 2.010 94.144 0.210 0.434 3.585 1.779 1.583 2.713 2.754 1.050 1.086 2.427 21.382 1.536 3.608 0.076 TEMP (F) 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.402 2.632 1.647 3.461 9.973 8.523 3.153 20.240 1.505 23.306 0.243 0.648 72.399 6.277 7.153 0.665 7.686 0.171 0.966 0.730 11.562 1.008 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 98.879 2.335 2.176 0.613 3.243 3.735 6.118 1.660 2.224 0.832 2.188 0.506 2.787 0.250 9.369 3.133 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 1.214 13.983 0.726 3.084 12.198 1.148 0.829 0.469 0.395 3.814 3.663 0.165 0.297 16.081 57.173 0.707 91.038 3.790 67.634 2.609 2.122 1.031 2.418 3. Resistance/Voltage Drop (Voltage Drop for EWT.898 1.486 82.979 9.843 0.804 26.096 4.705 1.835 2.151 0.542 2.428 2.206 0.873 0.689 3.564 6.774 0.168 0.313 34.311 17.237 1.715 1.103 2.165 3.906 3.356 0.502 0.262 3.710 0.Table 33 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs.286 2.245 24.956 1.582 1.239 2.522 88.459 1.112 2.317 3.786 1.473 27.614 14.892 15.301 0.228 0.060 2.640 3.155 0.296 0.843 18.430 0.450 3.698 0.647 1.717 9.385 2.781 5.779 21.761 0.278 1.351 28.229 5.143 48.344 0.509 3.047 38.265 1.871 77.485 0.655 2.081 5.086 1.601 3.217 1.362 0.804 1.146 0.800 37.259 0.759 2.291 0.822 1.191 0.402 0.679 41.497 5.231 0.735 2.286 0.251 0.538 1.060 2.145 3.395 0.490 65.680 1.016 0.160 0.423 0.224 3.622 4.147 2.185 0.264 0.855 4.142 0.190 1.480 3.095 1.072 1.557 0.322 0.435 35.318 3.185 3.494 0.656 1.416 0.068 1.191 2.964 2.027 14.373 1.299 3.386 3.982 1.815 0.179 0.165 2.668 3.160 1.170 3.349 2.474 3.298 4.243 3.162 55.658 3.541 46.556 3.375 0.138 2.949 2.272 0.804 50.335 3.789 23.465 3.376 2.175 69.449 85.681 1.674 0.960 19.416 11.082 3.270 2.448 1.529 0.449 13.311 53.977 1.538 0.296 2.141 1.637 5.217 2.185 32.192 2.737 4.888 0.141 1.929 5.091 6.281 3.388 0.272 63.567 0.588 3.104 1.387 12.194 0.213 8.926 2.051 1. 586 3.030 0.758 0.875 54.251 0.407 0.663 2.138 0.371 0.506 10.735 0.079 19.685 2.247 40.302 1.754 1.669 0.609 1.547 2.204 0.123 2.329 0.461 5.580 69.889 1.592 38.633 26.283 0.555 51.691 0.489 32.817 2.266 0.844 1.230 0.845 38.591 0.858 0.773 2.093 1.627 8.325 15.163 0.076 2.200 TEMP (C) 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.696 12.807 43.580 1.266 3.217 2.229 1.246 5.559 2.300 0.860 2.532 22.749 14.061 1.290 1.969 0.085 11.710 1.480 83. Resistance/Voltage Drop (Voltage Drop for EWT.258 0.134 3.583 4.312 2.225 5.450 48.260 94.134 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 1.515 14.247 3.433 0.549 3.538 0.687 3.250 65.666 1.205 61.801 1.971 5.462 3.309 0.161 6.439 1.417 1.807 0.041 1.360 0.434 3.194 1.441 9.006 971 938 906 876 836 805 775 747 719 693 669 645 623 602 583 564 547 531 516 502 489 477 466 456 446 436 427 419 410 402 393 385 376 367 357 346 335 324 312 299 285 55 Downloaded from www.490 0.982 1.871 1.160 1.668 3.710 5.125 73.170 78.555 0.461 0.182 0.999 0.457 1.387 1.514 3. and OAT) TEMP (C) –32 –31 –30 –29 –28 –27 –26 –25 –24 –23 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –17 –16 –15 –14 –13 –12 –11 –10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 3.165 88.363 2.782 0.345 3.349 0.420 57.142 0.959 10.623 1.395 0.536 6.094 17.827 23.339 0.340 1.216 27.945 2.274 0.629 0.237 0.670 1.593 2.021 1.163 20.383 0.158 1.000 4.888 2.223 0.713 0.475 0.563 3.265 1.065 3. LWT.404 3.538 1.649 3.com manuals search engine .168 0.140 3.799 1.188 0.447 0.158 0.940 0.028 3.832 0.184 16.639 2.912 0.360 2.008 2.126 1.573 0.861 3.029 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 100.454 2.118 1.701 3.217 0.499 7.944 1.101 2.272 2.313 21.985 2.389 4.378 1.231 TEMP (C) 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 1.Manualslib.170 2.935 1.199 0.244 1.184 2.Table 34 — 5K Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs.903 2.202 24.610 0.103 3.522 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 7.420 0.058 18.786 4.204 4.730 2.177 0.406 3.044 8.313 3.193 0.629 3.840 6.177 3.949 9.885 0.621 30.154 0.376 3.212 3.536 45.079 1.485 9.489 3.342 12.337 1.146 0.265 2.025 2.866 29.211 0.550 1.476 34.459 2.244 0.855 7.497 1.026 13.649 0.734 1.500 2.705 3.281 3.539 3.319 0.608 3.150 0.774 2.407 2.291 0.493 1.172 0. RGT.506 0. 019 88.789 1.965 0.298 3.802 3.067 4.564 4.684 2.070 1.715 24.079 1.215 4.876 0.111 4.590 2.300 177.592 2.940 70.363 4.542 66.433 0.388 0.998 3.338 0.190 1.467 4.Manualslib.042 23.697 3.453 1.354 0.815 1.532 0.292 4.685 7.059 2.397 4.287 97.698 5.891 1.546 4.383 6.317 TEMP (F) 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 2.391 2.349 2.468 0.319 53.209 TEMP (F) 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.139 12.056 3.523 0.567 0.533 4.206 1.413 0.860 30. Resistance/Voltage Drop (For SPT) TEMP (F) –25 –24 –23 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –17 –16 –15 –14 –13 –12 –11 –10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 4.763 1.288 0.394 0.697 2.304 1.235 4.202 2.308 11.662 75.654 31.284 1.000 9.594 1.255 1.867 1.665 4.147 3.838 26.475 1.622 2.370 0.544 1.344 149.644 4.557 49.715 2.328 0.999 6.814 12.762 9.621 4.663 1.225 1.056 7.343 2.558 0.597 4.236 110.610 35.006 103.387 1.750 4.445 3.445 4.208 3.173 2.666 0.030 2.782 0.572 4.549 14.738 1.447 0.031 10.359 0.333 0.279 0.841 1.932 2.966 1.869 7.323 0.561 2.483 0.380 4.448 8.233 1.021 3.476 0.480 1.132 1.808 0.272 0.183 122.809 2.591 1.478 13.530 6.426 0.770 0.786 1.507 7.296 0.595 0.699 0.343 0.559 3.251 8.086 3.781 57.565 1.733 0.927 3.386 18.187 1.003 1.409 2.576 0.923 3.676 4.350 1.039 55.539 2.515 0.379 2.439 62.250 139.365 0.302 1.558 100.319 2.439 2.996 0.187 11.888 43.128 1.399 22.750 3.986 2.903 19.531 3.165 6.012 0.752 30.745 0.447 19.639 1.290 2.443 134.169 1.571 5.876 4.926 2.655 4.683 6.526 9.370 4.178 3.384 17.688 1.402 126.062 1.238 3.627 46.655 0.577 34.284 0.086 50.346 4.585 0.615 3.089 1.790 37.376 0.503 3.890 0.776 3.656 1.020 91.382 0.264 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 2.612 58.000 171.112 3.Table 35 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs.862 8.928 1.980 0.114 1.264 1.474 3.715 4.552 16.429 4.729 80.273 4.089 4.975 3.297 2.096 4.603 3.686 4.253 2.693 52.828 3.096 1.387 3.919 0.407 0.493 12.878 3.705 4.625 1.827 5.614 0.549 107.710 0.383 3.884 11.174 4.413 4.461 4.759 3.277 4.278 1.904 17.095 4.722 0.925 14.903 3.717 154.449 5.008 3.357 3.585 4.634 0.891 130.727 68.934 0.676 0.573 20.440 0.244 1.984 4.108 1.490 4.180 13.719 1.033 1.113 25.177 28.115 2.994 2.345 1.349 0.028 1.009 29.519 4.505 4.249 10.905 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 14.752 2.396 82.501 10.185 4.853 3.313 3.244 3.400 1.060 94.148 1.692 183.400 0.500 2.951 3.624 0.043 2.540 0.840 3.453 1.508 1.052 1.465 64.687 1.275 0.488 2.961 5.327 5.049 2.769 4.254 4.194 144.598 42.752 1.507 0.998 20.328 4.396 24.654 3.162 77.268 3.238 159.714 15.240 44.530 2.764 10.839 2.848 0.821 0.016 998 981 964 947 931 915 900 885 870 855 841 827 814 800 787 774 762 749 737 725 714 702 691 680 670 659 649 639 629 620 610 601 592 583 574 566 557 56 Downloaded from www.615 1.078 8.292 0.025 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 196.733 4.498 1.455 3.963 2.087 2.171 85.820 1.587 3.991 16.416 3.713 1.645 0.161 21.687 0.314 0.153 4.921 1.324 41.855 1.309 0.874 18.124 2.166 2.746 2.681 3.723 3.948 1.144 2.168 1.567 1.333 7.409 1.670 3.643 2.461 0.653 8.098 5.476 4.835 0.681 36.758 0.003 1.083 2.318 0.238 6.741 4.231 2.724 4.560 4.328 3.949 0.894 1.633 4.210 5.536 1.491 60.268 0.549 0.211 1.777 2.300 9.604 0.866 2.569 33.597 26.696 4.018 118.286 72.195 4.178 3.305 0.824 13.044 4.838 6.426 1.079 165.076 114.593 11.com manuals search engine .373 27.065 47.260 2.150 1.431 1.324 1.529 3.758 4.862 0.419 0.300 0.901 2.795 0.470 2.491 0.521 1.131 15.808 2.441 16.310 4.666 4.975 1.326 1.870 2.453 189.117 3.439 2.926 38.454 0.609 4.499 0.375 1.045 1.132 4.653 2.770 22.118 39.366 1.606 32. 605 1.813 1.693 1.392 49.488 2.582 1.367 32.800 1.588 86.774 2.533 4.375 0.521 1.469 3.530 6.920 2.522.287 0.961 3.828 3.721 2.700 4.410 171.654 31.530 1.850 5.862 0.183 1.813 0.com manuals search engine .790 9.921 10.944 2.355 0.426 4.120 1.274 3.716 4.640 47.748 4.870 3.407 8.319 52.450 3.279 0.303 4.Manualslib.269 4.037 1.587 3.052 44.730 10.386 0.404 147.682 4.926 1.010 920 830 57 Downloaded from www.134 138.000 9.889 3.087.340 1.000 69.345 0.170 135.323 13.770 5.878 2.342 156.873 3.431 1.663 0.683 0.056 3.644 4.085 4.558 0.336 0.996 0.400 1.883 19.542 0.675 2.975 1.075 2.781 3.109 36.703 0.252 1.580 2.288 1.480 1.603 3.510 188.140 1.887 0.390 1.918 4.608 0.020 1.807 115.602 4.350 2.340 3.177 1.571 9.090 17.099 2.680 21.160 45.328 3.337 2.762 4.686 3.508 4.165 3.878 1.738 1.335 4.666 2.162 4.090 4.086 1.972 18.140 107.171 23.720 627.266 6.913 0.070 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 167 176 185 194 203 212 221 230 239 248 257 266 275 284 293 302 311 320 329 338 347 356 12.055 1.433 3.083 2.546 5.686 25.280 56.121.367 4.574 0.820 218.315 2.396 0.544 4.011 1.162 72.662 77.727 4.464 TEMP (C) 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 3.591 0.777 2.217 3.918 20.734 3.498 28.512 0.117 1.250 1.385 1.579 2.365 0.720 7.402 122.150 1.117 4.776 8.463 81.990 25.806 6.626 0.164 8.025 0.440 834.111 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 200.030 29.903 18.071 12.200 7.784 1.Table 36 — 10K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs.104 1.235 2.255 16.220 1.557 4.178 2.439 1.500 2.940 68.000 166.637 1.265 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 2.280 475.419 0.830 1.810 37.457 0.272 0.200 1.868 97.645 0.255 1.444 0.482 130.790 0.600 2.217 1.482 4.052 26.044 4.408 0.397 4.837 0.203 4.610 2.381 3.692 1. Resistance/Voltage Drop (For SPT) TEMP (C) –32 –31 –30 –29 –28 –27 –26 –25 –24 –23 –22 –21 –20 –19 –18 –17 –16 –15 –14 –13 –12 –11 –10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 4.400 TEMP (C) 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 VOLTAGE DROP (V) 0.042 3.284 2.889.302 0.483 0.663 4.493 11.418 10.231 2.714 15.710 109.096 6.986 2.940 0.324 1.648 1.127 2.537 3.617 42.327 0.711 58.733 4.310 0.220 3.637 3.318 0.235 4.056 7.324 40.968 RESISTANCE (Ohms) 15.470 0.681 13.745 0.219 61.580 4.445 2.774 5.391 2.070 1.327 5.401 7.294 0.400 15.396 24.297 1.153 38.025 1.060 91.005 974 944 915 889 861 836 811 787 764 742 721 700 680 661 643 626 609 592 576 561 Table 37 — 86K Thermistor vs Resistance (DTT) TEMP (C) TEMP (F) RESISTANCE (Ohms) TEMP (C) TEMP (F) RESISTANCE (Ohms) -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 -40 -31 -22 -13 -4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 158 2.527 0.917 3.870 6.280 2.876 1.362 1.942 11.370 4.562 1.182 34.485 3.000 2.833 2.752 1.340 177.943 1.431 0.767 0.740 363.990 280.480 1.449 10.580 30.957 65.889 2.455 4.590 1.555 2.497 0.013 21.003 3.124 4.157 2.415 55.000 14.724 0.440 86.743 3.075 102.014 5.215 1.199 4.624 4. If a situation arises where the drive does not function properly. motor. If fan motor must be removed for service or replacement. Damage to the drive will result. SPTB WARNING Hazard of electrical shock. J8 Connector CAUTION If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period of time exceeding three years (due to storage. be sure to regrease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard.S) and a30-499 Fig. apply input power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating the motor. the optional or accessory Motormaster V controller uses an input signal from the AUX board. The exposed end of the fan motor shaft is protected from weather by grease. If necessary. The ComfortLink controls must be configured for MMV operation in order for it to operate. See Fig. This can result in premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is operated after such a long period of inactivity or storage. a30-4975 DPTA SPTA WARNING When configured as shown in this literature. Before attempting to operate the drive. 30 — Chilled Water Flow Switch a30-4976 Fig. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage. Tighten the bolt to 15 ± 1 ft-lb (20 ± 1. Do not continuously cycle input power to the drive more than once every two minutes. Wait three minutes after disconnecting incoming power before servicing drive.Manualslib. Fig. this equipment is designed to start when it receives line power. In order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for operation after a long period of inactivity. Use extreme caution when servicing the drive. ACCSY DPT LWT LVT OAT RGT SEN SPT — — — — — — — — LEGEND Accessory Discharge Pressure Transducer Leaving Water Temperature Sensor Low Voltage Terminal Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Return Gas Temperature Sensor Sensor Terminal Block Space Temperature Sensor CAUTION DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals T1.). the electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive can change internally. be sure all procedures pertaining to installation and wiring have been properly followed. the information provided below and in Table 38 can be used to troubleshoot the drive.com manuals search engine . resulting in excessive leakage current. Ensure that all personnel are clear of fans and guards are installed before applying power. This is configured under the Configuration menu (ConfigurationMMMMR. and T3. Drive assembly includes externally mounted current limiting resistors. T2. Failure to comply could result in possible personal injury.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 RED BLK RED BLK BLU BLU RED BLK RGTA RGTB J12 3 4 OAT LVT T55 23 22 SEN T-55 ACCSY LOW SOUND FAN — A shroud and a wire guard provide protection from the rotating fan. For proper performance. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed. The fan motor has a step in the motor shaft. The controller is factory configured and requires no field programming. Severe damage to the drive will result. SPACE TEMPERATURE ACCESSORY OR DUAL CHILLER LWT RED BLK RED BLK RED GRN BLK RED GRN BLK RED GRN BLK RED GRN BLK EVAPORATOR ENTERING FLUID TEMP Motormaster® V Controller — The Motormaster V J8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 EVAPORATOR LEAVING FLUID TEMP B C A B C A B C A B C A + + + + - DPTB controller is standard on size 010 and 015 units. For other sizes. 32. 29 — Thermistor Connections to Main Base Board.3 N·m). switch any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation. The MMV output speed is displayed in Hz. etc. fan should be positioned such that it is securely seated on this step. 31 — Mounted Fan Position 58 Downloaded from www. and driven equipment. Failure to comply could result in possible personal injury. IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (counterclockwise when viewed from above). GENERAL OPERATION — The speed varies in proportion to a 4 to 20 mA signal produced by the ComfortLink™ controls. Follow the Configuration mode table and verify that all items under sub-modes UNIT. cycle power to the chiller to reset the VFD.selecting “YES”. 59 Downloaded from www. Press Mode to store new setting. press the Mode key again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode (the parameter menu will be accessed at the parameter that was last viewed or changed before exiting). the password must be entered in order to access the parameters again. • P50: FAULT HISTORY — Last 8 faults • P51: SOFTWARE version • P52: DC BUS VOLTAGE — in percent of nominal. REPLACING DEFECTIVE MODULES — The ComfortLink™ replacement modules are shown in Table 40. and that it can be changed by using the up and down buttons. If the main base board (MBB) has been replaced. Pressing the Mode will store the new setting and also exit the PROGRAM mode. Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for 30RAP Liquid Chillers (completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder. F1. F2-F9. 3.) 4. MS-FC-A1 or MS-FC-B1 depending on model) trips. the password is not required to access the parameters. Use the and buttons to scroll to the desired parameter number. and the process to enter the password must be repeated. Unit damage may occur from improper programming. Set P05 to ‘04 . they should measure approximately 20 ohms. To disable automatic control mode and enter manual speed control mode: 1. The upper right-hand decimal point will begin blinking. 20% = 4 mA. To enter password and change program values: 1. fill out the current information in the Configuration mode on a new checklist. GF. 100% = 20 mA Manual Starter Trip — If the VFD manual starter (MS-FCHS. This is an EEPROM memory chip and is accessible from the front of the VFD. After two minutes. It should not be removed with power applied to the VFD. Ensure unit is well grounded to eliminate ground currents along communication lines. If all three restart attempts are unsuccessful. In these configurations. the display will read “P01”. One additional jumper is required to configure the drive for 50/60 Hz operation and input voltage. EPM CHIP — The drive uses a electronic programming module (EPM) chip to store the program parameters.keypad’. Press Mode. DRIVE PROGRAMMING CAUTION It is strongly recommended that the user NOT change any programming without consulting Carrier service personnel. For all other voltages. Upper right decimal point blinks. press the Mode button to display the present parameter setting. Any additional field-installed accessories or options (RSET. the MMV follows a 4 to 20 mA speed reference signal present on terminals 25 (+) and 2 (-). See Table 39 for proper inputs. NOTE: If the display flashes “Er”. Once the correct password value is entered. the drive will trip into FAULT LOCKOUT (LC). CONFIGURATION — The MMV is configured for 1 of 12 operation modes based on the inputs to the control terminal block. which requires a manual reset. See Fig. press the Mode button. If communications are lost only while Motormaster V control is in operation. To change password: first enter the current password then change parameter P44 to the desired password. To enter the PROGRAM mode to access the parameters. The drive provides 2 kinds of troubleshooting modes: a status matrix using the 3-digit display (P57. these devices should measure approximately 7 ohms.4-20mA control’ to restore 4 to 20 mA control.4 • P53: MOTOR VOLAGE — in percent of rated output voltage • P54: LOAD — in percent of drives rated output current rating • P55: VDC INPUT — in percent of maximum input: 100 will indicate full scale which is 5 v • P56: 4-20 mA INPUT — in percent of maximum input. Once the desired parameter number is found. Change P05 to ‘01. or Fo faults). Press Mode to display present parameter number. Upper right decimal point blinks. Tailor the various options and configurations as needed for this particular installation. Display reads “00”. 2. order a signal isolator (CEAS420876-2) and power supplies (CEAS221045-01. Use and to change setting. Manual Reset — If fault condition has been removed.Manualslib. (See Fig.com manuals search engine . which indicates that the PROGRAM mode has been accessed at the beginning of the parameter menu (P01 is the first parameter). The display will read “00” and the upper right-hand decimal point will be blinking. verify that all configuration data is correct. Resistance values decrease at higher temperatures and increase at lower temperatures. This configuration menu also contains the gains and minimum speed for the Motormaster control logic. OPT1 and OPT2 are correct. Use the and buttons to scroll to the password value (the factory default password is “1111”) and press the Mode button. Fault Codes — The drive is programmed to automatically restart after a fault and will attempt to restart three times after a fault (the drive will not restart after CF. it will change to the mode selected according to the inputs. the password was incorrect. The 30RAP units use operating modes 5-8. SLCT sub-modes) should also be verified as well as any specific time and maintenance schedules. Once the drive is powered. The collective group is displayed through parameters 50-60 and all values are read-only. 2. 2 required) for the CCN communication line. If the Mode key is pressed within two minutes of exiting the PROGRAM mode. 33. locate the inrush current protectors (3 round black disks per motor) and verify their resistance. indicating that the present parameter setting is being displayed. These are standard resistances at 77 F (25 C). Usually rated input voltage x 1. 3. Troubleshooting — Troubleshooting the Motormaster® V control requires a combination of observing system operation and VFD information. P58) and real time monitoring of key inputs and outputs. This information is needed later in this procedure. To change another parameter. For units operating at 208 v or 230 v. 33. power to chiller off and at ambient temperature (not hot immediately after stopping VFD). Check value with mating plug disconnected. LOSS OF CCN COMMUNICATIONS — Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) communications with external control systems can be affected by high frequency electrical noise generated by the Motormaster V control. Push UP and DOWN arrow key to set manual speed. 5. cF. If the checklist does not exist. This will activate the PASSWORD prompt (if the password has not been disabled). Fig.460. 32 — Typical Motormaster Wiring EPM L1 L2 L3 Mode DANGER MMV TERMINAL BLOCK T1 T2 T3 BB+ BUTTONS DISPLAY Mode Fig.575V) COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (208/230.com manuals search engine . 33 — Motormaster® V Mode Buttons and Mode Display 60 Downloaded from www.230V) ~ ~ ~ YEL 8 6 BLK WHT 3 AUX FB MM OFM TB — — — — — LEGEND Auxiliary Fuse Block Motormaster Outdoor Fan Motor Terminal Block CONFIGURATION TABLE MODE 5 6 NOMINAL VOLTAGE 208/230/460/575* 208/380 Hz 60 60 CONTROL INPUT (PINS 25. 2) External control 4-20 mA External control 4-20 mA START JUMPER TB1-TB2 TB13A-TB2 *208-v can run in mode 5 or 6.LOW AMBIENT OPERATION (MOTORMASTER V) FB3 BLK 11 YEL 12 BLU 13 21 22 23 FIOP/ACCESSORY 1 2 3 MMR 14 FROM AUX-J4 FB1 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 MM-A BLK YEL BLU L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 2 *1 25 2 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 OFM1 GRN/YEL * MM SIGNAL CONNECTION TB 1 13A VOLTAGE 208/230/460/575 380 HZ 60 60 HIGH SCCR ONLY YEL VIO 11 240 1/4W RED BLK FB2 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 21 22 23 BLK YEL BLU 11 12 13 FC2 21 BLK-1 BLK-2 BLK-3 CHC 1 2 3 1 3 2 OFM2 22 23 GRN/YEL ~ ~ ~ BLK 4 2 BLK WHT BLK BLK 1 2 a30-4977 CHC COOLER/PUMP HEATERS (380.Manualslib. Resetting requires cycling start command (or power). Control Fault: A blank EPM. Restore factory defaults P48. see section above. Pin 6 should be 5 v output. Fo Drive display = 60. If that does not work. Drive will operate at 57 Hz until reset or loss of start command. Data Fault: User data and OEM defaults in the EPM are corrupted. replace drive. EPM LCS OEM VFD — — — — LEGEND Electronic Programming Module Lost Control Signal Outside Equipment Manufacturer Variable Frequency Drive 61 Downloaded from www. If the drive remains in CURRENT LIMIT too long. Check settings in communication software to match PXX. Mechanical problem with the driven equipment.Manualslib. Output Transistor Fault: Phase to phase or phase to ground short circuit on the output.0 even though it is cold outside and it should be running slower Drive display = ‘---’ even though drive should be running Drive display = 8. it can trip into a CURRENT OVERLOAD fault (PF).com manuals search engine . SOLUTION Check cooling fan operation Perform a factory reset using Parameter 48 — PROGRAM SELECTION. replace EPM. Feedback voltage displayed on P-69. Overhauling load. Boost settings are too high. Internal Faults: The control board has sensed a problem Feedback signal is above set point Start jumper is missing Feedback signal is below set point and fan is at minimum speed Feedback or speed signal lost. Pin 5 (feedback) should be somewhere between 0 and 5 v. Check for loose electrical connections. Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately Reduce boost or increase acceleration values. If unsuccessful. EPM Fault: The EPM is missing or damaged.Table 38 — Fault Codes FAULT CODE AF CF cF DESCRIPTION High Temperature Fault: Ambient temperature is too high. Single-phase Fault: Single-phase input power has been applied to a three-phase drive. Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately Check for dirty coils Check for motor bearing failure Check input power phasing CL GF HF JF LF OF PF SF F1 F2-F9. Failed output transistor. See section above Check for proper set point Check liquid line pressure In stand alone mode: Check transducer wiring and feedback voltage. indicating that the serial link has been lost. Cooling fan has failed (if equipped). Incompatibility Fault: An EPM with an incompatible parameter version has been installed. Acceleration rate is too fast. Check line voltage — set P01 appropriately Check serial connection (computer) Check settings for PXX. Low DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too low. Deceleration rate is too fast. or an EPM with corrupted data has been installed. Check Parameter P25 from Table 39 is set correctly. Current Overload Fault: VFD is undersized for the application. Serial Fault: The watchdog timer has timed out. Either remove the EPM or perform a factory reset (Parameter 48) to change the parameter version of the EPM to match the parameter version of the drive. CURRENT LIMIT: The output current has exceeded the CURRENT LIMIT setting (Parameter 25) and the drive is reducing the output frequency to reduce the output current.0 even though fan should be running faster VFD flashes 57 and LCS Consult factory Check for proper set point Check liquid line pressure Replace start jumper. Check for faulty condenser fan motor. High DC Bus Voltage Fault: Line voltage is too high. Manualslib. 01 = no PID Min feedback = 0 (0V *10) Max feedback = 50 (5V * 10) Proportional gain = 4% Integral gain = . Used when PID disabled and 4-20mA input is at 20 mA Clear history? 01 = maintain.6 0 0 0 0 50 200 60 1 111 8 50 01 08 01 0 50 4 . 0-5V. (set to 02 to clear) Program selection: Program 1 – 12 PI Mode: 05= reverse.5 0 0 47 0 0 18.0 12.6 0 0 0 0 60 200 60 1 111 8 60 01 05 01 0 50 4 .5% at low frequencies Accel boost: 0% Slip compensation: 0% Preset spd #1: speed if loss of control signal Preset spd #2: 0 Preset spd #3: 0 Preset spd 4 default — R22 set point.2 5 0 0 MODE 7 01 01 06 01 04 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 01 10 10 0 0 8 50 125 100 50 0. 03 = reverse only Acceleration time: 10 sec Deceleration time: 10 sec DC brake time: 0 DC BRAKE VOLTAGE 0% Min freq = 8 Hz ~ 100 – 160 rpm Max freq Current limit: (%) Motor overload: 100 Base freq: 60 or 50 Hz Fixed boost: 0. 05= R22.5 0 0 57 0 0 18.5 0 0 47 0 0 18.N.2 PI acell/decel (set point change filter) = 5 Min alarm Max alarm MODE 5 01 01 06 01 04 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 01 10 10 0 0 8 60 125 100 60 0.2 with timer Units editing: 02 = whole units Rotation: 01 = forward only.2 5 0 0 MODE 6 02 01 06 01 04 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 01 10 10 0 0 8 60 110 100 60 0.2 5 0 0 LEGEND NA — Not Applicable PID — Proportional Integral Derivative TB — Terminal Block 62 Downloaded from www.com manuals search engine . used when PID mode is disabled and 4-20mA input is at 4 mA Speed at max feedback: 60 or 50 Hz. 06=R134a TB-14 output: 01 = none TB-30 output: 01 = none TB-31 Output: 01 = none TB-13A function sel: 01 = none TB-13B function sel: 01 = none TB-13C function sel: 01 = none TB-15 output: 01 = none Control: 01 = Terminal strip Serial link: 02 = enabled 9600.6 0 0 0 0 50 200 60 1 111 8 50 01 07 01 0 50 4 .2 5 0 0 MODE 8 02 01 06 01 04 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 01 10 10 0 0 8 50 110 100 50 0. TB12-2 open Preset spd 5 default — R134a set point. 04=4-20mA (NO PI).0 12. 02 = 6 kHz.0 12.6 0 0 0 0 60 200 60 1 111 8 60 01 06 01 0 50 4 . 03 = 8 kHz Startup mode: flying restart Stop mode: coast to stop Standard Speed source: 01= keypad.0 12.5 0 0 57 0 0 18. 02 = high line Carrier Freq: 01 = 4 kHz.8. TB12-2 closed Preset spd 6 default Preset spd 7 default Skip bandwidth Speed scaling Frequency scaling 50 or 60 Hz Load scaling: default (not used so NA) Accel/decel #2: default (not used so NA) Serial address Password:111 Speed at min signal: 8 Hz.Table 39 — Motormaster® V Program Parameters for Operating Modes PARAMETERS P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P08 P09 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 P40 P41 P42 P43 P44 P45 P46 P47 P48 P61 P62 P63 P64 P65 P66 P67 P68 DESCRIPTION Line Voltage: 01 = low line. For accessory Navigator replacement. PUMP PERFORMANCE CHECK — The factory-installed pumps in the 30RAP units are shipped with a single impeller size available for that pump. 8. 7. factory-installed hydronic package. Jobsite conditions may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more often than recommended. Reinstall all module connectors. PUMP MODIFICATIONS AND IMPELLER TRIMMING — See applicable section in the Installation instructions. the head will correspond to the intersection of an impeller curve with the vertical axis of the pump chart. Downloaded from www. If pump impeller diameter is not known: If pump impeller diameter has been trimmed and the size is not known. 7. In addition to this information. Water flow rate can be determined by using a differential pressure gage with the Bell & Gossett circuit setter balance valve calculator. The easiest way to confirm pump performance is to “dead-head” the pump and read the differential pressure across the pressure ports on the pump. 10. make sure the plug is installed at TB3 in the LEN connector. Remove the defective module by removing its mounting screws with a Phillips screwdriver. 5. Verify that the instance jumper (MBB) or address switches (all other modules) exactly match the settings of the defective module. proceed as in Step 1. verify that: • All air has been purged from the system. especially in coastal and industrial applications. (with Software) 30RA502134 HK50AA031 REPLACEMENT PART NO. 3. Once the impeller diameter is known. The pump was selected based on the flow and head requirements as provided to Carrier. The correct impeller diameter is that which corresponds to the measured head. centrifugal pumps (such as on the 30RAP units) can be “dead-headed” for short amounts of time. set points and schedules. it is recommended that actual pump performance be verified and compared to the applicable pump curve. Carrier Corporation strongly recommends that this information be thoroughly reviewed prior to operation of the chiller. • Circuit setter balance valve has been correctly set. Read GPM from applicable impeller curve. Verify that all green LEDs are blinking and that the scrolling marquee or Navigator™ display is communicating correctly. (This information is also provided in the installation instructions. consult the information below for proper maintenance and service. For factory-installed hydronic system. but can be used to “double-check” the pump measurement. it may be desirable to make some field modifications to obtain optimum pump performance. 5. 1. Package the defective module in the carton of the new module for return to Carrier.com manuals search engine . Verify that all module red LEDs blink in unison. 6. Check that all power to unit is off. It is not 63 MAINTENANCE Recommended Maintenance Schedule — The following are only recommended guidelines. Before any pump modifications are made. NOTE: Handle boards by mounting standoffs only to avoid electrostatic discharge. Save the screws later use. Pump must rotate clockwise when viewed from motor end of pump. 4. 3. Carefully disconnect all wires from the defective module by unplugging its connectors. Connect a differential pressure gage across the pump at the ports provided on the pump volutes. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed. settings. Bell & Gossett. Table 40 — Replacement Modules MODULE Main Base Board (MBB) Scrolling Marquee Display Energy Management Module (EMM) Navigator Display EXV AUX REPLACEMENT PART NO. In many cases.) This method will not directly measure pressure differential seen by the pump. See base unit installation instructions. Return the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to its previous position. If pump impeller diameter is known: a. Verify all configuration information. It is recommended to keep the time short due to excessive heat build-up in the pump. CHANGING OF PUMP SEALS — See Bell & Gossett service instruction manual provided with the hydronic package. (without Software) HK50AA029 HK50AA030 30GT515218 HK50AA033 30GT515217 32GB500442E HK50AA028 N/A HK50AA026 N/A Hydronic Package — If the unit is equipped with a uncommon for actual pump duty to be different than what was anticipated at time of selection.Manualslib. Since the “dead-head” condition is a no-flow condition. 2. Pump impeller has been improperly trimmed and is not providing sufficient flow. Wrong pump motor rotation. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation. Verify the ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch is in the OFF position. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring power. There may be more than one disconnect switch.WARNING Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. This can be done in a variety of ways: 1. 6. 9. each factory-installed hydronic package is supplied with a packet of information supplied by the manufacturer. RESET OF CHILLER WATER FLOW — See applicable section in the Installation instructions. Mount the new module in the unit’s control box using a Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2. 2. Verify that cable connections at the switch and at the terminal block are secure. “Dead-heading” can be done by shutting the circuit setter valve on the discharge side of the pump. and removing the module from the control box. it is necessary to determine which impeller curve to read. Routine: For machines with e-coat condenser coils: • Periodic clean water rinse. 4. NOTE: Although not all pumps can be safely “deadheaded”. Restore control power. b. 8. COMPRESSOR SAFETIES — The 30RAP units with ComfortLink™ controls include a compressor protection board that protects the operation of each of the compressors. Unit restarts when required to satisfy leaving fluid temperature set point. • Check chilled water flow switch operation. Low fluid flow. core face. from the Downloaded from www. • Check compressor oil level. • Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they are securely fastened to the motor shaft. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent damage to air centers. CAUTION Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between air centers and refrigerant tubes. Elimination of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. • Obtain and test an oil sample. Every 3 months (for all machines): • Check refrigerant charge. The following steps should be taken to clean MCHX condenser coils: 1. CAUTION If unit stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of the safety devices listed. the unit will be shut down. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coreface or trapped within the mounting frame and brackets.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer. repair as necessary. • Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated. CHILLED FLUID PROOF-OF-FLOW SWITCH OPEN — After the problem causing the loss of flow has been corrected. LOW SATURATED SUCTION — Several conditions can lead to low saturated suction alarms and the chiller controls have several override modes built in which will attempt to keep the chiller from shutting down. clean as necessary. potable water is authorized for cleaning condenser coils. replace if greater than ± 2° F (1. do NOT repeatedly reset these alert and/or alarm conditions without identifying and correcting the cause(s). Place the switch in the ENABLE position for local switch control or in the REMOTE CONTACT position for control through remote contact closure. • Check all condenser fans for proper operation.Manualslib. if equipped.• Check condenser coils for debris. 64 Microchannel Heat Exchanger (MCHX) Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendations CAUTION Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser coils. 4. determine and correct cause before attempting another restart. 3-7 for component arrangement and control wiring diagrams. Clean condenser face by spraying the core steady and uniformly from top to bottom while directing the spray straight toward the core. reset is manual by resetting the alarm with the scrolling marquee as shown in Table 42. OPEN 24-V CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER(S) — Determine the cause of the failure and correct. Put on personal protective equipment including safety glasses and/or face shield. or OAT as required. but must be reset manually by resetting the alarm with the scrolling marquee as shown in Table 42. • Check to be sure that the proper concentration of antifreeze is present in the chilled water loop. tighten as necessary. Restart is automatic after MBB start-up cycle is complete. the unit will stop immediately. • Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all components. Clean cooler vessel if necessary.com manuals search engine . To avoid permanent damage and potential freezing of the system. replace as necessary. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. Reset circuit breaker(s). • Check chilled water strainers. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage the coil. • Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop. • Check cooler heater operation. 3. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing. LWT. Change oil only if necessary. If there is a command for a compressor to run and there is no current. Compressor Short Circuit — There will not be current if the compressor circuit breaker that provides short circuit protection has tripped. Every month: • Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrigerant loss and presence of moisture. Only clean. low refrigerant charge and plugged filter driers are the main causes for this condition. Unit restarts automatically. if applicable. COOLING LOAD SATISFIED — Unit shuts down when cooling load has been satisfied. replace as necessary. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condenser coils. Each board senses the presence or absence of current to each compressor. Every 12 months (for all machines): • Check all electrical connections. restart is automatic through normal MBB start-up. TROUBLESHOOTING Complete Unit Stoppage and Restart — Possible causes for unit stoppage and reset methods are shown below and in Table 41. Refer to Fig. THERMISTOR FAILURE — If a thermistor fails in either an open or shorted condition. UNIT ENABLE-OFF-REMOTE CONTACT SWITCH IS OFF — When the switch is OFF. Do not exceed 900 psig or 30 degree angle. then one of the following safeties or conditions have turned the compressor off: Compressor Overcurrent — All compressors have internal line breaks or a motor protection device located in the compressor electrical box. • Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks. • Check accuracy of thermistors. 2. • Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled Water Temperature — Saturated Suction Temperature) which may indicate fouling. GENERAL POWER FAILURE — After power is restored. clean as necessary. Compressor Motor Over Temperature — The internal linebreak or over temperature switch has opened. • Inspect all contactors and relays. waterproof clothing and gloves. Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. Replace EWT. The longer the compressor runs unloaded. first determine the cause of the alarm and correct it.Manualslib. See Fig. the compressor should be stopped and allowed to cool. Toggle the display to “YES” and press ENTER . Alarms will also occur if the current sensor board malfunctions or is not properly connected to its assigned digital input. the motor will run until the motor protector trips. a special mode.com manuals search engine . the digital compressor will be shut off. Press ENTER to display the default password. They are assigned code numbers as described in Table 42. an alert is generated. 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Recommended Cooling Time (Minutes) Compressor Unloaded Run Time (Minutes) *Times are approximate. Press until the sub-menu item RCRN “RESET ENTER and ALL CURRENT ALARMS” is displayed. 1111. will be enabled and all other compressors will be turned off. At this temperature.4 C). The first outdoor fan stage is turned on immediately. See Fig. which occurs up to 90 minutes later. Fig. reset automatically before the motor protector resets. A label located above the terminal box identifies models that contain this technology. an internal bi-metal disk valve opens and causes the scroll elements to separate. The following method must be used to reset manual alarms: Before resetting any alarm. In this case. An alarm will then be enabled to indicate that service is required. If the password has been changed. 34. which may take up to 2 hours. If discharge temperature exceeds 265 F (129. If the compressor is not stopped. Press ENTER . 35 — Recommended Minimum Cool Down Time After Compressor is Stopped* 65 Downloaded from www. high ambient temperature. Advanced scroll temperature protection will Alarms and Alerts — These are warnings of abnormal or fault conditions. The control will prompt the user for a password. This will indicate that a compressor contactor has failed closed. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the LED on the side of the scrolling marquee display. by displaying PASS and WORD. the longer it must cool before the bi-metal disk resets. Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if the condition corrects itself. use the arrow keys to change each individual character. which stops compression. 34 — Advanced Scroll Temperature Protection Label Advanced scroll temperature protection is a form of internal discharge temperature protection that unloads the scroll compressor when the internal temperature reaches approximately 300 F. Outdoor fans will continue to operate. Press ENTER for each character. If the compressor is commanded OFF and the current sensor reads ON. High Discharge Gas Temperature Protection — Units equipped with digital compressors have an additional thermistor located on the discharge line. 30RAP UNIT SIZE 010-060 CUTOUT psig 650 kPa 4482 psig 500 CUT-IN kPa 3447 ASTP Protection Trip — All non-digital Copeland compressors are equipped with an advanced scroll temperature protection (ASTP). and the presence of a sound blanket will increase cool-down times. The other stages of fan will be turned on as required by SCT. including high humidity. Below are the factory settings for the fixed high pressure switch. NOTE: Various factors. The alarms will be reset. Suction and discharge pressures balance while the motor continues to run. 35 for approximate reset times. and may cause either one circuit or the whole unit to shut down. Fig.High-Pressure Switch Trip — The high pressure switch has opened. Compressor Stuck on Control. To manually reset ASTP. Check control circuit for ground or short. Check piping for oil traps. Replace or repair as needed. Replace control. Recommended that system be filled with an appropriate glycol mixture to prevent freezing of pumps and fluid tubing. Check the controls. Find the cause of trip and reset breaker. Clean or replace as needed. Replace pump. Compressor Cycles Off on Loss of Charge Compressor Cycles Off on Cooler Freeze Protection Compressor Shuts Down on High-Pressure Control Unit Operates Too Long or Continuously Unusual or Loud System Noises Hot Liquid Line Frosted Liquid Line Frosted Suction Line Freeze-Up System not drained for winter shutdown Loose Thermistor 66 Downloaded from www. Evacuate and recharge.Table 41 — Troubleshooting SYMPTOMS Cooler Circulating Pump Does Not Run CAUSE Power line open Control fuse or circuit breaker open Tripped power breaker Loose terminal connection Improperly wired controls Low line voltage Pump motor defective Pump seized Low refrigerant charge Thermistor failure System load was reduced faster than controller could remove stages High-pressure control acting erratically Noncondensables in system Condenser dirty Fans not operating System overcharged with refrigerant Low refrigerant charge Control contacts fused Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter drier Defective insulation Damaged compressor Piping vibration Compressor noisy Compressor Loses Oil Leak in system Mechanical damage (Failed seals or broken scrolls) Oil trapped in line Shortage of refrigerant due to leak Restricted filter drier Expansion valve admitting excess refrigerant (note: this is a normal condition for brine applications) Stuck EXV Improper charging REMEDY Reset circuit breaker.Manualslib. Clean condenser. Check motor winding for open or short. and suction pressure in cooler is equal to or greater than pressure corresponding to 32 F (0° C). Check wiring and rewire if necessary. Make sure a full quantity of fluid is flowing through the cooler while charging. Repair leak and recharge. Unit will restart after fluid temperature rises back into the control band. Check line voltage — determine location of voltage drop and remedy deficiency. Add refrigerant. Replace compressor if necessary. Reset breaker and replace fuse. Support piping as required. Check connections. Repair leak. Verify thermistors are fully inserted in wells. Check compressor and replace if necessary. Replace filter drier. Reduce charge.com manuals search engine . Replace control. Avoid rapidly removing system load. Check for loose pipe connections or damaged compressor Replace compressor (worn bearings). Replace thermistor. Repair leak and recharge. Replace valve if defective. Replace compressor. Repair or replace if defective. Check for loose compressor holddown bolts. Replace valve if defective. or wiring damage/error. Welded compressor contactor. failure. faulty CSB. CSB wiring error. loss of condenser air. filter drier plugged. noncondensables. damaged Automatic Thermistor cable/wire or wiring error.EN) and thermistor is outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) If return gas sensors are enabled (RG. High-pressure switch open. Chiller runs under normal control/set points. operation beyond capability. failure. Compressor 2 Failure Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure Cooler Entering Fluid Thermistor Failure Circuit A Return Gas Thermistor Failure Unit shut down Chiller shut down immediately Chiller shut down immediately Circuit A shut down Manual A060 A061 Alarm Alarm failure. faulty CSB. noncondensables. T051 Alert Circuit A. T077 Alert T078 Alert Circuit B shutdown after pumpdown complete Chiller runs as a stand alone machine Circuit A shut down T079 Alert T090 Alert T091 Alert Circuit B shut down T092 Alert Circuit A shut down T093 T094 Alert Alert Circuit B shut down Digital compressor shut down. or wiring damage/error. Welded compressor contactor.Manualslib. Transducer failure. CSB wiring error. T073 Alert Outside Air Thermistor Failure Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) failure. Transducer failure. loss of condenser air. noncondensables. loss of condenser air. Compressor 2 Failure Unit shut down Manual T055 Alert Circuit B. Faulty expansion valve or pressure transducer Automatic suction or leaving fluid thermistor. poor Automatic connection to MBB. 67 Downloaded from www. suction pressure transducer or leaving fluid thermistor. faulty CSB. Thermistor failure. or wiring damage/error. suction pressure transducer or leaving fluid thermistor. Transducer failure. Welded compressor contactor. damaged cable/wire or wiring error.Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes ALARM/ ALERT CODE ALARM OR ALERT DESCRIPTION WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? Compressor feedback signal does not match relay state Respective current sensor board (CSB) feedback signal is ON when the compressor should be off Compressor feedback signal does not match relay state Respective current sensor board (CSB) feedback signal is ON when the compressor should be off Compressor feedback signal does not match relay state Respective current sensor board (CSB) feedback signal is ON when the compressor should be off Compressor feedback signal does not match relay state Respective current sensor board (CSB) feedback signal is ON when the compressor should be off Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) If return gas sensors are enabled (RG. or wiring damage/error. Manual A056 Alarm Circuit B. damaged Automatic Thermistor cable/wire or wiring error. noncondensables. Manual A055 Alarm Circuit B. cooler/pump heaters are energized. damaged Automatic Thermistor cable/wire or wiring error. Compressor 1 Failure Unit shut down Manual T052 Alert Circuit A. Compressor 1 Failure Compressor B1 shut down. filter drier plugged. Compressor 1 Failure Compressor A1 shut down. Automatic damaged cable/wire or wiring error.com manuals search engine . High-pressure switch open. Faulty expansion valve. Welded compressor contactor. faulty CSB. CSB wiring error. Faulty expansion valve or suction pressure transducer Automatic or leaving fluid thermistor. poor Automatic connection to MBB. operation beyond capability. loss of condenser air. Chiller runs under normal control/set points. operation beyond capability. operation beyond capability. poor Automatic connection to MBB. Compressor 1 Failure Unit shut down Manual T056 Alert Circuit B. High-pressure switch open. Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) Outside of range (0 to 667 psig) Outside of range (0 to 667 psig) Outside of range (0 to 420 psig) Outside of range (0 to 420 psig) Discharge thermistor (DTT) is either open or shorted Automatic Thermistor failure. T074 Alert Space Temperature/Dual Chiller Thermistor Failure Circuit A Saturated Suction Temperature exceeds Cooler Leaving Fluid Temperature Circuit B Saturated Suction Temperature exceeds Cooler Leaving Fluid Temperature Lead/Lag LWT Thermistor Failure Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer Failure Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) Faulty expansion valve. failure. Manual A051 Alarm Circuit A. poor Automatic connection to MBB. damaged Automatic Thermistor cable/wire or wiring error. Manual A052 Alarm Circuit A. damaged Automatic cable/wire or wiring error. T068 None T069 None Circuit B Return Gas Thermistor Failure Circuit B shut down Temperature reset disabled. Compressor 2 Failure Compressor A2 shut down. Temperature reset disabled.EN) and thermistor is outside range of –40 to 245 F –40 to 118 C) ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL RESET METHOD PROBABLE CAUSE High-pressure switch open. When capacity reaches 0. filter drier plugged. CSB wiring error. Compressor 2 Failure Compressor B2 shut down. Circuit A shutdown after pumpdown complete. Dual LWT thermistor failure. Transducer failure. filter drier plugged. damaged Automatic Thermistor cable/wire or wiring error. Manual reset thereafter. low/ restricted condenser airflow T133 Alert Circuit A Low Suction Pressure Suction pressure below 34 psig for 8 seconds or below 23 psig Circuit shut down Faulty or sticking EXV. Reverse any two incoming power leads to correct.8 C) before restart Automatic restart after first daily occurrence.com manuals search engine . Manual restart thereafter. Faulty expansion valve. Alarm notifies user that chiller is 100% down.8 C) for 5 minutes. Check for correct fan rotation first. ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL Circuit not allowed to start. circuit overcharged Faulty expansion valve. A140 Alert Reverse Rotation Detected Chiller not allowed to start. Circuit shut down Faulty transducer/high pressure switch. Manual reset thereafter. head pressure control.8 C) for 5 minutes. Manual restart thereafter. plugged filter drier.Manualslib.1 C) for 5 minutes Circuit saturated suction temperature pressure transducer > 70 F (21. 68 Downloaded from www. T112 Alert Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature Circuit B High Saturated Suction Temperature Circuit shut down Manual T113 Alert Circuit shut down Manual Automatic restart after first daily occurrence. Chiller shutdown without going through pumpdown. RESET METHOD PROBABLE CAUSE Refrigerant leak or transducer failure Circuit A Loss of Charge Manual T111 Alert Circuit B Loss of Charge Circuit not allowed to start. T126 Alert Circuit A High Discharge Pressure Compressor operation outside of operating envelope. only after first 3 daily occurrences. plugged filter drier. low/ restricted condenser airflow T127 Alert Circuit B High Discharge Pressure Compressor operation outside of operating envelope. plugged filter drier. low refrigerant charge. Automatic restart after first daily occurrence. plugged filter drier. low refrigerant charge. Circuit B shut down. faulty suction pressure transducer. plugged filter drier. faulty suction gas thermistor. Check unit settings. faulty suction gas thermistor. Circuit shut down Faulty or sticking EXV. Manual restart thereafter. low refrigerant charge.8 C) before restart Automatic. low cooler fluid flow Faulty expansion valve. T115 Alert Circuit B Low Suction Superheat Suction superheat is less than 5° F (2. T116 Alert Circuit A Low Cooler Suction Temperature Mode 7 caused the compressor to unload 6 consecutive times with less than a Circuit shut down 30-minute interval between each circuit shutdown. Discharge Thermistor (DTT) Compressor A1 shut reading is greater than 250 F down 3 Discharge Gas Temperature alarms occur within a day Compressor A1 shut down Manual T117 Alert Circuit B Low Cooler Suction Temperature Manual T118 Alert High Discharge Gas Temperature Alert High Discharge Gas Temperature Automatic A118 Alarm Manual Automatic. plugged filter drier. T114 Alert Circuit A Low Suction Superheat Circuit A shut down. low cooler fluid flow Refrigerant charge. Chiller is unable to run. Faulty Expansion valve. Circuit shut down Faulty transducer/high pressure switch. Chiller is not allowed to start. Manual Refrigerant leak or transducer failure Faulty Expansion valve. A150 Alarm Emergency Stop A151 Alarm Illegal Configuration A152 Alarm Unit Down Due to Failure Both circuits are down due to alarms/alerts. Reading from OAT sensor must drop 5 F (2. CCN Network command. Manual restart thereafter. Automatic restart after first daily occurrence. Configuration error. faulty suction pressure transducer or high entering fluid temperature. If the compressors are off and discharge pressure reading is < 26 psig for 30 sec. faulty suction pressure transducer. faulty suction pressure transducer. Manual Automatic once CCN command for EMSTOP returns to normal Manual once configuration errors are corrected Automatic once alarms/alerts are cleared that prevent the chiller from starting. faulty suction pressure transducer or high entering fluid temperature.Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ ALERT CODE T110 ALARM OR ALERT Alert DESCRIPTION WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? If the compressors are off and discharge pressure reading is < 26 psig for 30 sec. head pressure control. Refrigerant charge.1 C) for 5 minutes Suction superheat is less than 5° F (2. only after first 3 daily occurrences. Reading from OAT sensor must drop 5 F (2. circuit overcharged Faulty expansion valve. Circuit saturated suction temperature pressure transducer > 70 F (21. faulty suction pressure transducer. Mode 8 caused the compressor to unload 6 consecutive times with less than a Circuit shut down 30-minute interval between each circuit shutdown. low refrigerant charge. T134 Alert Circuit B Low Suction Pressure Suction pressure below 34 psig for 8 seconds or below 23 psig Incoming chiller power leads not phased correctly CCN emergency stop command received One or more illegal configurations exists. wiring error. Chiller is not allowed to run. Chiller is unable to run. wiring error. faulty wiring or failed AUX board. faulty contacts on pump contactor Wiring error. T176 Alert Automatic T177 Alert 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure Automatic A189 Alarm Cooler Pump Auxiliary Contact Inputs Miswired Both pump outputs are turned off. Manual PROBABLE CAUSE Time/Date/Month/ Day/Year not properly set. Chiller controls to CSP1. Replace MBB if error occurs again. Pump 2 turned off. T190 Alert Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Cooler Pump 1 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Cooler Pump 2 Failed to Provide Flow at Start-Up Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Pump 1 turned off. Chiller defaults to Local On mode. 4 to 20 mA temperature reset disabled. Real Time Clock Hardware Failure Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure A154 Alarm Hardware failure with MBB T155 Alert Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Configuration/storage failure with MBB No Action Manual A156 A157 A172 Alarm Alarm Alarm Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure A/D Hardware Failure Loss of Communication with EXV Board Configuration/storage failure with MBB Hardware failure with peripheral device MBB loses communication with EXV board Chiller is not allowed to run.Manualslib. Demand Limit set to 100%. wiring error. pump circuit breaker tripped. Chiller allowed to run if Pump 2 successfully starts and flow switch is closed.com manuals search engine . Faulty signal generator. Pump 2 will be started if available. Automatic T175 Alert Automatic Reset function disabled. Pump 2 will be started if available. Chiller is not allowed to run. Potential failure of MBB. 4 to 20 mA set point disabled. Chiller returns to 100% demand limit control. faulty wiring or failed Energy Management Module (EMM). Pump 1 will be started if available. All compressors shut down. Chiller allowed to run if Pump 2 successfully starts. faulty contacts on pump contactor T191 Alert Manual T192 Alert Manual T193 Alert Manual T194 Alert Manual T195 Alert Manual Wiring error. contactor failure Wiring error. Pump 1 turned off.Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ ALERT CODE T153 ALARM OR ALERT Alert DESCRIPTION WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? Internal clock on MBB fails ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL Occupancy schedule will not be used. contactor failure 69 Downloaded from www. faulty pump contactor auxiliary contacts. Main Base Board failure. Main Base Board failure. Set point function disabled. Main Base Board failure. Chiller allowed to run if Pump 1 successfully starts. Pump 1 will be started if available. Faulty signal generator. RESET METHOD Automatic when correct clock control restarts. pump circuit breaker tripped. Manual Wiring error. Faulty signal generator. faulty contacts on pump contactor Wiring error. Manual Manual Automatic T173 Alert Loss of Communication with EMM MBB loses communication with EMM Automatic T174 Alert 4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Input Failure Loss of Communication with the AUX Board 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset Input Failure If configured with EMM and input less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA MBB loses communication with AUX Board. Wiring error. Pump 1 turned off. All compressors shut down. or faulty EMM. Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts open for 26 seconds after initially made. Pump 2 will be started if available. Pump 2 turned off. or faulty EMM. Demand limit function disabled. Pump 1 turned off. Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts did not close within 26 seconds after pump was started Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts did not close within 26 seconds after pump was started Pump 1 did not provide flow to close flow switch within 60 seconds Pump 2 did not provide flow to close flow switch within 60 seconds Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts open for 26 seconds after initially made. All compressors shut down. Pump 2 will be started if available. Wiring error. faulty wiring or failed EXV board. Download current operating software. Chiller returns to normal set point control. or faulty EMM. faulty contacts on pump contactor T196 Alert Flow Lost While Pump 1 Running Cooler flow switch contacts open for 3 seconds after initially made Manual Wiring error. If configured with EMM and input less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA If configured with EMM and input less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts are closed when Pump 2 output is energized or if Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts are closed when Pump 1 output is energized. Pump 1 turned off. Manual Wiring error. Pump 2 will be started if available. contactor failure Wiring error. Wiring error. pump circuit breaker tripped. MN) item. Wiring error. Cooler pump continues to run a minimum of 5 minutes (if control enabled).Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ ALERT CODE ALARM OR ALERT DESCRIPTION WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL All compressors shut down.MN) item. Chiller shutdown. faulty flow switch or interlock. faulty wiring. Chiller runs as a stand-alone machine. the second pump will be started if available RESET METHOD PROBABLE CAUSE T197 Alert Flow Lost While Pump 2 Running Cooler flow switch contacts open for 3 seconds after initially made Manual Wiring error. Total capacity is 100% and LWT is greater than LWT reading one minute ago Alert only. Dual chiller control disabled.1. plugged fluid strainer. faulty pump contactor (welded contacts) Wiring error.DN) expired.2. failed Slave chiller MBB module. CCN Address for both chillers is the same. Building load greater than unit capacity.com manuals search engine .Manualslib.A) Dual chiller routine disabled. Complete pump 1 maintenance and enter 'YES' for Pump 1 Maintenance Done (P. Pump 1 will be started if available. pump circuit breaker tripped Wiring error. For models with dual pumps.3 C) above Brine Freeze point (BR. low water flow. low water flow.2. Check for other alarms/alerts.7° C) for 1 minute after a circuit is started Pump 1 Service Countdown (P. Master/slave run as stand-alone chillers. Both EWT and LWT must be at least 6 F (3. Pump 2 Service Countdown (P. Must be different. wrong slave address. power loss at Master chiller. pump circuit breaker tripped. Check CCN. faulty pump contactor (welded contacts) Wiring error. Manual Faulty thermistor. low water/brine flow or compressor fault. Chiller runs as a stand-alone machine Automatic T204 Alert Loss of Communication with Master Chiller Slave chiller MBB loses communication with master chiller MBB Automatic T205 Alert Master and Slave Chiller with Same Address Master and slave chiller have the same CCN address (CCN.DN) expired. Chiller allowed to run if Pump 1 successfully starts and flow switch is closed. faulty flow switch or interlock Cooler pump failure.1. power loss at slave chiller. the second pump will be started if available All compressors shut down. pump circuit breaker tripped. For models with dual pumps. T300 Alert Cooler Pump 1 Scheduled Maintenance Due None Automatic Routine pump maintenance required T301 Alert Cooler Pump 2 Scheduled Maintenance Due None Automatic Routine pump maintenance required 70 Downloaded from www. A208 Alarm EWT or LWT Thermistor failure Cooler EWT is less than LWT by 3° F (1. contactor failure T198 Alert Cooler Pump 1 Aux Contacts Closed While Pump Off Cooler Pump 2 Aux Contacts Closed While Pump Off Pump 1 Auxiliary Contacts closed for 26 seconds when pump state is off Pump 2 Auxiliary Contacts closed for 26 seconds when pump state is off Cooler flow switch contacts failed to close within 1 minute (if cooler pump control is enabled) or within 5 minutes (if cooler pump control is not enabled) after start-up Flow switch opens for at least 3 seconds after being initially closed If configured for cooler pump control and flow switch input is closed for 5 minutes while pump output(s) are off Master chiller MBB loses communication with slave chiller MBB Automatic when aux contacts open Automatic when aux contacts open Wiring error.A under the OPT2 sub-mode in Configuration at both chillers. Complete pump 2 maintenance and enter 'YES' for Pump 1 Maintenance Done (P. Cooler pump shut off (if control enabled). Chiller not allowed to start Chiller not allowed to start Chiller not allowed to start. Faulty cooler pump.FZ). failed master chiller MBB module. T199 Alert T200 Alert Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Failed to Close at Start-Up Manual A201 Alarm Cooler Flow/Interlock Contacts Opened During Normal Operation Cooler Pump Interlock Closed When Pump is Off Manual A202 Alarm Chiller shut down Automatic when aux contacts open T203 Alert Loss of Communication with Slave Chiller Dual chiller control disabled. Automatic for first. Pump 2 turned off.FZ) Chiller shutdown without going through pumpdown. faulty pump contactor (welded contacts) Wiring error. faulty wiring. Automatic A207 Alarm Cooler Freeze Protection Cooler EWT or LWT is less than Brine Freeze (BR. contactor failure. Automatic T206 Alert High Leaving Chilled Water Temperature LWT read is greater than LCW Alert Limit. Manual reset thereafter. No action taken. Correct rotation can be verified by a gage set and looking for a differential pressure rise on start-up. The module is powered with 24 vac from the units main control box. Wiring error. open internal protection. wiring error. the compressor ASTP device will open.T. failed transformer. Temperature sensors embedded in the compressor motor windings are the inputs to the module.DN) expired. wrong address Failed module. IMPORTANT: Prolonged operation in the wrong direction can damage the compressor. incorrect safety wiring. Wiring error. If the current sensor board reads OFF while the compressor relay has been commanded ON. Turn on the compressor in question using Service Test mode. loose connection plug. and B2 respectively. 71 Downloaded from www.MN) item. CSB failure. Failed module. Low Refrigerant Charge — If the compressor operates for an extended period of time with low refrigerant charge. Chiller runs under own control Automatic CCN CSB EEPROM EMM EWT EXV HSM LCW LWT MBB OAT SCT WSM — — — — — — — — — — — — — LEGEND FOR TABLE 42 Carrier Comfort Network Current Sensor Board Electronic Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Energy Management Module Entering Fluid Temperature Electronic Expansion Valve Hydronic System Manager Leaving Chilled Water Leaving Fluid Temperature Main Base Board Outdoor-Air Temperature Saturated Condensing Temperature Water System Manager COMPRESSOR FAILURE ALERTS T051. circuit breaker trip. CSB failure. wiring error. Wiring Error — A wiring error might not allow the compressor to start. Chiller runs under own control Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic T951 Alert Loss of Communication with Chillervisor System Manager CSM forces removed. deenergizing the compressor contactor. CSB failure. Coil Service Countdown (C. wrong address Failed module. If the compressor does start. T056 (Circuit B Compressor Failures) — Alert codes 051. Circuit Breaker Trip — The compressors are protected from short circuit by a breaker in the control box. CSB failure. A2. loose connection plug. and 056 are for compressors A1. When this occurs. loose connection plug. The module output is a normally closed contact that is wired in series with the compressor contactor coil. wiring error.Manualslib.com manuals search engine . contact opens. POSSIBLE CAUSES Compressor Overload — Either the compressor internal overload protector is open or the external overload protector (Kriwan module) has activated. B1.L.L.MN) item. 055. 052. These alerts occur when the current sensor (CS) does not detect compressor current during compressor operation. To check out alerts T051-T056: 1. verify it is rotating in the correct direction.Table 42 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont) ALARM/ ALERT CODE ALARM OR ALERT DESCRIPTION WHY WAS THIS ALARM GENERATED? Strainer Service Countdown (S. failed transformer. The external overload protector modules are mounted in the compressor wiring junction box. wrong address T500 T501 T502 T503 T504 T505 T950 Alert Alert Alert Alert Alert Alert Alert Current Sensor Board A1 Failure Current Sensor Board A2 Failure Current Sensor Board A3 Failure Current Sensor Board B1 Failure Current Sensor Board B2 Failure Current Sensor Board B3 Failure Loss of Communication with Water System Manager Compressor A1 shut down Compressor A2 shut down Compressor A3 shut down Compressor B1 shut down Compressor B2 shut down Compressor B3 shut down WSM forces removed. Wiring error. Complete condenser coil cleaning and enter 'YES' for Coil Maintenance Done (C. or incorrect compressor wiring. failed transformer. Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value Alert occurs when CSB output is a constant high value No communications have been received by the MBB within 5 minutes of last transmission No communications have been received by the MBB within 5 minutes of last transmission No communications have been received by the MBB within 5 minutes of last transmission ACTION TAKEN BY CONTROL RESET METHOD PROBABLE CAUSE T302 Alert Strainer Blowdown Scheduled Maintenance Due None Automatic Routine strainer maintenance required T303 Alert Condenser Coil Maintenance Due None Automatic Routine condenser coil maintenance required CSB failure.DN) expired. Chiller runs under own control Automatic T952 Alert Loss of Communication with Hydronic System Manager HSM forces removed. Wiring error. 2. the control turns off the compressor. then most likely the problem is one of the following: HPS open. Complete strainer blowdown and enter 'YES' for Strainer Maintenance Done (S.T. an alert is generated. CSB failure. In a compressor motor overload condition. Wiring error. which will cause the compressor to trip on its overload protection device. T052 (Circuit A Compresser Failures) T055. Wiring error. If the compressor does not start. 0 to 420. T116 (Circuit A Low Cooler Suction Temperature) T117 (Circuit B Low Cooler Suction Temperature) — Alert codes 116 and 117 are for circuits A and B respectively. These alerts occur when the appropriate saturated condensing temperature is greater than the operating envelope shown in Fig 14. If discharge gas temperature is open or shorted. T094 (Discharge Gas Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs for units which have the digital compressor installed on circuit A. faulty 5-v power supply. A2. or a loose connection. T112 (Circuit A High Saturated Suction Temperature) T113 (Circuit B High Saturated Suction Temperature) — Alert codes 112 and 113 occur when compressors in a circuit have been running for at least 5 minutes and the circuit saturated suction temperature is greater than 70 F (21. 055. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty thermistor. the A118 alarm will be generated and the alarm must be reset manually. Failure of this thermistor will disable any elements of the control which requires its use. the control turns off the compressor. The cause of the alarm is usually a faulty thermistor. If there is 24 v at the contactor. When this occurs. 2. If the compressor is on. or a loose connection. a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error. 052. Verify that there is not 24-v at the contactor coil. Use the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. the circuit will be shutoff. faulty 5-v power supply. verify that the compressor is on.0 to 667. These alarms are only monitored for a period of 10 seconds after the compressor relay has been commanded OFF. check relay on MBB and wiring. if a compressor stuck failure occurs and the current sensor board reports the compressor and the request off. If the compressor is off and there is no current. or T58 device. The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge or a faulty thermistor.1 C). The low superheat alert is generated and the circuit is shut down. COMPRESSOR STUCK ON FAILURE ALARMS Circuit A A051. A060 (Cooler Leaving Fluid Thermistor Failure) — The sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) then the alarm will occur. T068.com manuals search engine of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C). or a loose connection. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. These alerts are generated if the capacity stages are reduced three times without a 30 minute interval between capacity reductions due to operating mode 7 or mode 8. IMPORTANT: Return to Normal mode and observe compressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor is working and condenser fans are energized. T092 (Circuit A Suction Pressure Transducer Failure) T093 (Circuit B Suction Pressure Transducer Failure) — Alert codes 092 and 093 are for circuits A and B respectively.B Compressor Return Gas Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs when the compressor return gas temperature sensor is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). The alert will reset itself when discharge temperature is less than 250 F (121.7° C). If SCT continues to . A052 Circuit B A055. 2. and 056 are for compressors A1.0 psig.1 C). T073 (Outside Air Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs when the outside air temperature sensor is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to 116 C). A056 — Alarm codes 051. T110 (Circuit A Loss of Charge) T111 (Circuit B Loss of Charge) — Alert codes 110 and 111 are for circuits A and B respectively. In addition. a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error. T090 (Circuit A Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure) T091 (Circuit B Discharge Pressure Transducer Failure) — Alert codes 090 and 091 are for circuits A and B respectively. Prior to the alert.Manualslib. check the contactor and the relay on the MBB. verify the CSB wiring and replace if necessary. or a loose connection. These alerts occur when the compressor is OFF and the discharge pressure is less than 26 psig. certain diagnostics will take place as follows: 1. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty transducer. Failure of this thermistor will disable any elements of the control which requires its use. the circuit will be shut off.0 psig. Return to Normal mode and observe compressor operation to verify that compressor current sensor is working and condenser fans are energized. and B2. 3. The alert will reset itself when discharge temperature is less than 250 F (121. The control will shut-off all other compressors. If this alert occurs 3 times within a day. These alarms occur when the CSB detects current when the compressor should be off. Verify CSB wiring. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty thermistor in the T55. T126 (Circuit A High Head Pressure) T127 (Circuit B High Head Pressure) — Alert codes 126 and 127 are for circuits A and B respectively. the control will command the condenser fans to maintain normal head pressure. T114 (Circuit A Low Superheat) T115 (Circuit B Low Superheat) — Alert codes 114 and 115 occur when the superheat of a circuit is less than 5 F (2. If any of the compressors are diagnosed as stuck on and the current sensor board is on and the request is off. T118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alert) A118 (High Discharge Gas Temperature Alarm) — This alert or alarm occurs for units which have the digital compressor installed on circuit A. A061 (Cooler Entering Thermistor Failure) — If the sensor reading is outside the range of –40 to 240 F (–40 to116 C) then the alarm will occur. a shorted or open thermistor caused by a wiring error.1 C). This is done to facilitate a service technician forcing a relay to test a compressor. the control will shut down one compressor on a circuit if that circuit's saturated condensing temperature is greater than the maximum SCT minus 5° F (2. The cause of the alert is usually a faulty transducer. an alarm is generated. The high saturated suction alert is generated and the circuit is shut down. 5. Failure of this thermistor will shut down the entire unit. B1. If the current sensor board reads ON while the compressor relay has been commanded OFF for a period of 4 continuous seconds.1 C). T074 (Space Temperature Thermistor Failure) — This alert occurs when the space temperature sensor is outside the range 72 Downloaded from www. The cause of the alert is usually low refrigerant charge or a faulty thermistor. If discharge gas temperature is greater than 268 F (131. To check out alarms A051-A056: 1. A circuit cannot run when this alert is active. These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0. or a loose connection.IMPORTANT: If the CS is always detecting current. Failure of this thermistor will shut down the entire unit. Use the scrolling marquee to reset the alert. Failure of this thermistor will shut down the appropriate circuit. T69 (Circuit A.8 C) for 5 continuous minutes. These alerts occur when the pressure is outside the range of 0. The possible causes include welded contactor or frozen compressor relay on the MBB. All compressors should be off. Check for welded contactor. 4. Place the unit in Service Test mode. A150 (Unit is in Emergency Stop) — If the CCN emergency stop command is received. All functions performed by the AUX board will stop. high outdoor ambient temperature coupled with dirty outdoor coil. plugged filter drier. 2. the board should be replaced. or the suction pressure is below 23 psig (158. T500. T173 (Energy Management Module Communication Failure) — This alert indicates that there are communications problems with the energy management. This alarm will disable mechanical cooling and will require manual reset. right when the compressor is brought on and 5 seconds afterwards. This alarm will clear when the variable is set back to "enable.6 kPa). reset and capacity input.com manuals search engine . With the above information. If the CCN point name "EMSTOP" in the system table is set to emergency stop. • Dual thermostat and switch demand limit configure • AUX board incorrect revision. If the suction pressure change 5 seconds after compression is greater than the suction pressure change 5 seconds before compression – 1. the board should be replaced. These alerts occur when the output of the CSB is a constant high value. A2. T153 (Real Time Clock Hardware Failure) — A problem has been detected with MBB real time clock hardware. This alarm indicates the unit is at 0% capacity. The alarm will automatically reset.25. T155 (Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. The cause of this alert may be low refrigerant charge. The unit control determines failure as follows: 1. The cause of the alarm is usually an overcharged system. The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA. If the alarm continues. A152 (Unit Down Due to Failure) — Both circuits are off due to alerts and/or alarms. T177 (4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Failure) — This alert indicates a problem has been detected with demand limit 4 to 20 mA input. the alarm is generated and the unit will be immediately stopped. The alarm will automatically reset. • Dual thermostat configured for single-circuit unit. 501. All functions performed by the EMM will stop. The reset function will be disabled when this occurs. the board should be replaced. If not equipped. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. T174 (4 to 20 mA Cooling Set Point Input Failure) — This alert indicates a problem has been detected with cooling set point 4 to 20 mA input. The rate of suction pressure change from 5 seconds before the compressor is brought on to when the compressor is brought on is calculated. 503. B1. and B2 respectively. The following are illegal configurations. • Unit configuration set to invalid type. T133 (Circuit A Low Suction Pressure) T134 (Circuit B Low Suction Pressure) — Alert codes 133 and 134 are for circuits A and B respectively. then there is a reverse rotation error. The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA. 3. the alert will occur and the circuit's remaining compressor will shut down. Add wind baffles if required.rise to greater than the maximum SCT.4 kPa) for 8 seconds. the board should be replaced. which can include demand limit.Manualslib. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. plugged liquid line filter drier. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. or a faulty high-pressure switch. A172 (Loss of Communication with the EXV Board) — This alarm indicates that there are communications problems with the EXV board. T176 (4 to 20 mA Reset Input Failure) — This alert indicates a problem has been detected with reset 4 to 20 mA input. T175 (Loss of Communication with the AUX Board) — This alarm indicates that there are communications problems with the AUX board. the test for reverse rotation is made. If the problem cannot be resolved. • Invalid unit size has been entered. for suction pressure change on the first activated circuit. If the alarm continues. the board should be replaced. Check head pressure operation. These alerts are generated if one of the two following conditions is satisfied: the circuit suction pressure is below 34 psig (234. A157 (A/D Hardware Failure) — A problem has been detected with A/D conversion on the boards. on power up. the CSB must be replaced." A151 (Illegal Configuration) — An A151 alarm indicates an invalid configuration has been entered. which can include digital scroll unloader operation and low ambient head pressure control. A140 (Reverse Rotation Detected) — A test is made once. or sticking EXV. indicating that the unit is down. Try resetting the power and check the indicator lights. These alerts reset automatically. A154 (Serial EEPROM Hardware Failure) — A problem has been detected with the EEPROM on the MBB. and 504 are for compressors A1. T504 (Current Sensor Board Failure — B xx Circuit B) — Alert codes 500. 4. If the alarm continues. The reset function will be disabled when this occurs. 73 Downloaded from www. T501 (Current Sensor Board Failure — A xx Circuit A) T503. consider adding low ambient temperature head pressure control. The input value is either less than 2 mA or greater than 22 mA. the unit will shut down immediately and broadcast an alarm back to the CCN. If the alert continues. The suction pressure of both circuits is sampled 5 seconds before the compressor is brought on. Reset is automatic when all alarms are cleared. If the alarm continues. The rate of suction pressure change from when the compressor is brought on to 5 seconds afterwards is calculated. A156 (Critical Serial EEPROM Storage Failure Error) — A problem has been detected with the EEPROM storage on the MBB. The alarm will automatically reset. etc.A2 HR.A HRS.A1 HR.U STR.x ºF Entering Fluid Temp xxx.com manuals search engine .F DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS xxx.B2 YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO xxx x xxx xx.P1 HR.P2 HRS.AC MODE CAP STGE ALRM TIME MNTH DATE YEAR HRS.B1 HR.PM OCC LS.) 01-31 74 Downloaded from www.12 (1 = January.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE ITEM EWT LWT SETP CTPT LOD.x ºF Leaving Fluid Temp xxx.x ºF Control Point xxx Load/Unload Factor COMMENT STAT Control Mode VIEW LD.xx xx Lead Pump Occupied Low Sound Active Override Modes in Effect Percent Total Capacity Requested Stage Current Alarms & Alerts Time of Day Month of Year 0=Service Test 1=Off Local 2=Off CCN 3=Off Time 4=Off Emrgcy 5=On Local 6=On CCN 7=On Time RUN HOUR xx Day of Month xx Year of Century UNIT RUN HOUR AND START xxxx HRS Machine Operating Hours xxxx Machine Starts xxxx HRS Pump 1 Run Hours xxxx HRS Pump 2 Run Hours CIRC AND COMP RUN HOURS xxxx HRS Circuit A Run Hours xxxx HRS Circuit B Run Hours xxxx HRS Compressor A1 Run Hours xxxx HRS Compressor A2 Run Hours xxxx HRS Compressor B1 Run Hours xxxx HRS Compressor B2 Run Hours 00:00-23:59 1 .U HR.B HR.x ºF Active Set Point xxx.Manualslib. 2 = February. M4 COIL SI.PM P.2.M0 C.M0 P.L.A2 ST.T.Done COIL MAINTENANCE DATES MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS CESR131460-XXXXX CESR131172-XXXXX CESR131333-XXXXX CESR131174-XXXXX CESR131171-XXXXX CESR130227-XXXXX COMMENT STRT User Entry User Entry PM User Entry User Entry VERS 75 Downloaded from www.1.M2 S.M4 MBB EXV AUX1 EMM MARQ NAVI DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION COMPRESSOR STARTS xxxx Compressor A1 Starts xxxx Compressor A2 Starts xxxx Compressor B1 Starts xxxx Compressor B2 Starts PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PUMP MAINTENANCE xxxx HRS Pump Service Interval xxxx HRS Pump 1 Service Countdown xxxx HRS Pump 2 Service Countdown YES/NO Pump 1 Maintenance Done YES/NO Pump 2 Maintenance Done PUMP MAINTENANCE DATES MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM STRAINER MAINTENANCE xxxx HRS Strainer Srvc Interval xxxx HRS Strainer Srvc Countdown YES/NO Strainer Maint.T.L.DN P.L.L.T.M2 P.B1 ST.MN CL.M1 P.M3 P.L. Done STRAINER MAINTENANCE DATES MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM MM/DD/YY HH:MM COIL MAINTENANCE xxxx HRS Coil Cleaning Srvc Int xxxx HRS Coil Service Countdown YES/NO Coil Cleaning Maint.1.DN C.M0 P.L.2.2.1.DN P.M1 S.MN P.2.A1 ST.M2 C.Manualslib.1.2.MN ST.M3 P.M3 S.M0 S.M2 P.M1 C.M1 P.M3 C.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Run Status Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM ST.2.T.M4 P.DN S.T.CL C.T.M4 STRN SI.B2 PUMP SI.1.T.2.1.DT C.com manuals search engine .L.ST S.DT S.1.MN PMDT P. A SP.A CC. Move switch to ENABLE OUTS EXV.B 76 Downloaded from www.x PSIG Discharge Pressure xxx.x PSIG Suction Pressure COMMENT PRC.x °F Space Temperature xxx.x °F Compr Return Gas Temp xxx.GAS SH.com manuals search engine .x °F Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A xxx.HPB CLP.B RGT.x ΔF Suction Superheat Temp TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B xxx.A ITEM DP.B2 xxx% xxx% ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF xx xx ON/OFF ON/OFF xx ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF xx ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF CMPA CMPB Temperature Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE ITEM CEWT CLWT OAT SPT DLWT SCT.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE TEST ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION Service Test Mode OUTPUTS EXV % Open EXV % Open Fan 1 Relay Fan 2 Relay Fan 3 Relay Fan 4 Relay Fan 5 Relay Fan 6 Relay Var Head Press % Var Head Press % Cooler Pump Relay 1 Cooler Pump Relay 2 Comp A1 Unload Time Cooler/Pump Heater Remote Alarm Relay CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST Compressor A1 Relay Comp A1 Unload Time Compressor A2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Relay CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST Compressor B1 Relay Compressor B2 Relay COMMENT To enable Service Test mode.x °F Saturated Condensing Tmp xxx.B SH.Manualslib.x PSIG Discharge Pressure xxx.B DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION PRESSURES CIRCUIT A xxx.x °F Outside Air Temperature xxx.B SST.TM CL.TM CC.B Pressures Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE PRC.x °F Saturated Suction Temp xxx.x ΔF Suction Superheat Temp COMMENT UNIT CIR.A SST.x °F Compr Return Gas Temp xxx.x PSIG Suction Pressure PRESSURES CIRCUIT B xxx.A SCT.x °F Cooler Entering Fluid xxx.x °F Saturated Suction Temp xxx.B1 CC.A DP. move Enable/Off/Remote contact switch to OFF.A2 MLV CC.A D.B SP.B DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION ENTERING AND LEAVING UNIT TEMPERATURES xxx.HPA V.B FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 V.x °F Discharge Gas Temp xxx.2 UL.A EXV.A1 UL.x °F Saturated Condensing Tmp xxx.1 CLP.x °F Cooler Leaving Fluid xxx.HT RMT.A CIR. Change TEST to ON.A RGT. x °F xxx.FZ DISPLAY xxx.x °F xxx.OFF B.Manualslib.1 PM.x °F xxx.OFF F.F.x 4-20 ma Demand Signal xx.F.RQ DLS1 DLS2 ICED DUAL FKA1 FKA2 FKA3 FKA4 FKB1 FKB2 FKB3 FKB4 DMND RSET CSP DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION GENERAL INPUTS ON/OFF Start/Stop Switch ON/OFF Cooler Flow Switch ON/OFF Cooler Pump 1 Interlock ON/OFF Cooler Pump 2 Interlock ON/OFF Heat Request ON/OFF Demand Limit Switch 1 ON/OFF Demand Limit Switch 2 ON/OFF Ice Done ON/OFF Dual Set Point Switch CIRCUIT INPUTS ON/OFF Compressor A1 Feedback ON/OFF Compressor A2 Feedback ON/OFF Compressor A3 Feedback ON/OFF Compressor A4 Feedback ON/OFF Compressor B1 Feedback ON/OFF Compressor B2 Feedback ON/OFF Compressor B3 Feedback ON/OFF Compressor B4 Feedback 4-20 MA INPUTS xx.ON F.x °F xxx.x 4-20 ma Cooling Set Point COMMENT GEN.x °F ITEM DESCRIPTION COOLING SET POINTS Cooling Set Point 1 Cooling Set Point 2 ICE Set Point HEAD PRESSURE SET POINTS Head Set Point Fan On Set Point Fan Off Set Point Base Fan Off Delta Temp Fan Stage Delta BRINE FREEZE SET POINT Brine Freeze Point RANGE –20 to 70 –20 to 70 –20 to 32 85 to 120 COMMENT Default: 44 F Default: 44 F Default: 32 F Default: 95 F Default: 95 F Default: 72 F Default: 23 F Default: 15 F Default: 34 F COOL HEAD 10 to 50 0 to 50 –20 to 34 FRZ Inputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE ITEM STST FLOW PM.I CRCT 4-20 77 Downloaded from www.3 H.DLT BR.com manuals search engine .DP F.x °F xx.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Set Points Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE ITEM CSP.x xxx xx.1 CSP.x 4-20 ma Reset Signal xx.2 HT.2 CSP.x °F xxx. S AMP.HPA V.EXV CIR.A CIR.S PLM.SH.R EXV.1 EXV.Manualslib.B ASH.A APPR AP.B SPH.B1 CC.A1 DPE.R S.B SPR.A4 CC.A2 CC.A SPH.O A.B 78 Downloaded from www.A3 CC.EXV B.SP OVR.A SPR.S AMP.A ASH.WP1 C.B4 DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION GENERAL OUTPUTS ON/OFF Fan 1 Relay ON/OFF Fan 2 Relay ON/OFF Fan 3 Relay ON/OFF Fan 4 Relay ON/OFF Fan 5 Relay ON/OFF Fan 6 Relay ON/OFF Fan Speed Circuit A ON/OFF Fan Speed Circuit B ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 1 ON/OFF Cooler Pump Relay 2 ON/OFF Cooler/Pump Heater ON/OFF Minimum Load Valve Relay OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV ON/OFF EXV % Open ON/OFF Circuit A Approach ON/OFF Approach Setpoint SH Reset at Max Unl-Dig Digload to Start SH RST Amount of SH Reset ON/OFF EXVA Override ON/OFF Suction Superheat Temp ON/OFF Active Superheat Setpt ON/OFF Active Mop Setpt ON/OFF Cir A EXV Position Limit ON/OFF Spare 1 Temperature OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A EXV ON/OFF EXV % Open ON/OFF Circuit B Approach ON/OFF Approach Setpoint ON/OFF EXVB Override ON/OFF Suction Superheat Temp ON/OFF Active Superheat Setpt ON/OFF Active Mop Setpt ON/OFF Cir B EXV Position Limit ON/OFF Spare 2 Temperature OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A ON/OFF Compressor A1 Relay ON/OFF Comp A1 Load Percent ON/OFF Compressor A2 Relay ON/OFF Compressor A3 Relay ON/OFF Compressor A4 Relay OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B ON/OFF Compressor B1 Relay ON/OFF Compressor B2 Relay ON/OFF Compressor B3 Relay ON/OFF Compressor B4 Relay COMMENT GEN.B2 CC.S PLM.com manuals search engine .2 CC.SP X.B3 CC.WP2 CLHT MLV.HPB C.R CC.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Outputs Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE ITEM FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 FAN5 FAN6 V.R SH_R OVR.SH.B APPR AP. T MOPS APPR XX MIN XXXX HRS YES/NO YES/NO X XX XX Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly Pump Changeover Hours Rotate Cooler Pumps Now EMM Module Installed Cnd HX Typ:0=RTPF 1=MCHX EXV MOP Set Point Config Approach Set Point Default: No Default: Automatic 0 = Automatic 1 = Pump 1 Starts first 2 = Pump 2 Starts first 0 to 10 minutes.E CPC PM1E PM2E PM.S PM.E PASS SIZE SZA.Manualslib. Default: 500 hours User Entry 79 Downloaded from www.1 SZB.T DISPLAY ON/OFF ON/OFF X ENBL/DSBL XXXX ITEM DESCRIPTION DISPLAY CONFIGURATION Test Display LEDs Metric Display Language Selection Password Enable Service Password UNIT CONFIGURATION Unit Size Compressor A1 Size Compressor A2 Size Compressor A3 Size Compressor A4 Size Compressor B1 Size Compressor B2 Size Compressor B3 Size Compressor B4 Size Suction Superheat Setpt Number of Fans EXV Module Installed Compressor A1 Digital Maximum A1 Unload Time UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE Cooler Fluid Minimum Load Valve Select Csb Boards Enable Cooler Pump Control Cooler Pump 1 Enable Cooler Pump 2 Enable Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt Cooler Pump Select COMMENT Off = English On = Metric Default: 0 0 = English 1 = Espanol 2 = Francais 3 = Portuguese UNIT XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX X YES/NO YES/NO XX Default: 5 Default: No Default: 7 Max = 12 (010.P EMM CND.3 SZA.4 SZB.2 SZB.2 SZA.SP FAN.TY MAX.3 SZB.DT ROT.S CSB.1 SZA.4 SH.S EXV A1.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE ITEM TEST METR DISP LANG PAS. Default: 1 min.DY PM.P.SL X OPT1 YES/NO ENBL/DSBL ON/OFF YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO X PM.015) Max = 10 (018-060) Default: Water 1 = Water 2 = Medium Temperature Brine Default: Enable Default: Off FLUD MLV.com manuals search engine . DELTA HP.LT 00:00 00:00 XXX % Low Sound Start Time Low Sound End Time Low Sound Capacity Limit CCN NETWORK CONFIGS CCNA CCNB CCN BAUD XXX XXX CCN Address CCN Bus Number X CCN Baud Rate HEAD PRESSURE CMP.DT XX XX SCT Delta For Comp B1 SCT Delta For Comp B2 80 Downloaded from www.M LS.DT XX XX SCT Delta For Comp A1 SCT Delta For Comp A2 HEAD PRESSURE CMP.DT B2.B B1.MD X XX XX ENBL/DSBL X Lead/Lag Circuit Select High LCW Alert Limit Minutes Off Time Ice Mode Enable Low Sound Mode Select LS.ND LS.DT A2.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS Control Method COMMENT Default: 0 0 = Enable/Off/Remote Switch 2 = Occupancy 3 = CCN Control Default: 1 1 = Equal 2 = Staged Default: 1 1 = Automatic 2 = Circuit A Leads 3 = Circuit B Leads Default: 60 Range: 2 to 60 F Default: 0 Minutes Range: 0 to 15 Minutes Default: Disable Default: 0 0 = Mode Disable 1 = Fan Noise Only 2 = Fan/Compressor Noise Default: 00:00 Default: 00:00 Default: 100% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 1 Range: 0 to 239 Default: 1 Range: 0 to 239 Default: 3 1 = 2400 2 = 4800 3 = 9600 4 =19.A A1.400 Default:12 Range: 0 to 50 Default:12 Range: 0 to 50 Default:12 Range: 0 to 50 Default:12 Range: 0 to 50 CTRL X LOAD X Loading Sequence Select LLCS OPT2 LCWT DELY ICE.200 5 =38. DELTA HP.ST LS.Manualslib.com manuals search engine . com manuals search engine .PCT S.B TYP.A MIN.A SPD.B OVR.Manualslib.B MAX.PCT X.1 EXV CIrc.PER A.Fan Sub Pre-close EXV .SCT X.B MIN.B SPD.A OVR.A MIN.B XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX 0.PCT M.B POF.A POF.A TYP.A Min Position EXVA Steps In Range EXVA STeps Per Second EXVA Fail Position In % EXVA Minimum Steps EXVA Maximum Steps EXVA Overrun Steps EXVA Stepper Type High SCT Threshold Open EXV X% On 2nd Comp Move EXV X% On DISCRSOL Pre-open EXV .A H.B MIN.Fan Adding Pre-close EXV .A EXV.B Start Pos EXV Circ.PCT DELY DISPLAY XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX 0.Lag Shut Lag Start Delay CIR B EXV CONFIGURATION STR.A MAX.B RNG.1 XXX XX XX XXX XXX XXX XXX ITEM DESCRIPTION CIR A EXV CONFIGURATION EXV CIrc.A RNG.B EXV.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM STR.B Min Position EXVB Steps In Range EXVB STeps Per Second EXVB Fail Position In % EXVB Minimum Steps EXVB Maximum Steps EXVB Overrun Steps EXVB Stepper Type Default: 50 0 to 100 Default: 8 0 to 100 0 to 65535 Default: 200 0 to 65535 Default: 0 0 to 100 Default: 0 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 Default: 167 0 to 65535 Default: 1 0 = UNIPOLAR 1 = BIPOLAR COMMENT Default: 50 0 to 100 Default: 8 0 to 100 0 to 65535 Default: 200 0 to 65535 Default: 0 0 to 100 Default: 0 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 Default: 167 0 to 65535 Default: 1 0 = UNIPOLAR 1 = BIPOLAR Default: 115 50 to 140 Default: 10 0 to 30 Default: 5 0 to 30 Default: 10 0 to 100 Default: 10 0 to 100 Default: 10 0 to 100 Default: 10 0 to 100 81 Downloaded from www.A Start Pos EXV Circ. APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM MMR.S P.GAN MM I.GAN D.GAN MIN.S DISPLAY YES/NO XX XX.X XX.X XX ITEM DESCRIPTION MOTORMASTER Motormaster Select Head Pressure P Gain Head Pressure I Gain Head Pressure D Gain Minimum Fan Speed RESET COOL TEMP COMMENT Default: NO Default: 1 Range: 1 to 4 Default: 0.1 Range: -20 to 20 Default: 0.0 Range: -20 to 20 Default: 5 Default: 0 0 = No Reset 1 = 4 to 20 mA Input 2 = Outdoor Air Temperature 3 = Return Fluid 4 = Space Temperature Default: 0.0 ΔF Range: -30 to 30 ΔF Default: 125 F Range: 0° to125 F Default: 0 F Range: 0° to125 F Default: 0.0 ΔF Range: -30 to 30 ΔF Default: 10.0 ΔF Range: 0° to125 F Default: 0 ΔF Range: 0° to125 F Default: 0.0 ΔF Range: -30 to 30 ΔF Default: 0 0 = None 1 = Switch 2 - 4 to 20 mA Input 3 = CCN Loadshed Default: 100% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 0 Range: 0 to 99 Default: 0% Range: 0 to 60% Default: 60 minutes Range: 0 to 120 minutes Default: 80% Range: 0 to 100% Default: 50% Range: 0 to 100% Default: Disable Default: Master Default: 2 Range: 0 to 239 Default: Master Leads 0 = Master Leads 1 = Slave Leads 2 = Automatic Default: 168 hours Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 5 minutes Range: 0 to 30 minutes Default: YES (CANNOT BE CHANGED) CRST X Cooling Reset Type MA.DG RM.NO RM.F RM.DG RT.NO RT.F RT.DG XX.XΔF XXX.X °F XXX.X °F XX.X °F XXX.XΔF XXX.XΔF XX.X °F 4-20 - Degrees Reset Remote - No Reset Temp Remote - Full Reset Temp Remote - Degrees Reset Return - No Reset Temp Return - Full Reset Temp Return - Degrees Reset DMDC X Demand Limit Select RSET DM20 SHNM SHDL SHTM DLS1 DLS2 LLEN MSSL SLVA LLBL LLBD LLDY PARA XXX% XXX XXX% XXX XXX% XXX% ENBL/DSBL SLVE/MAST XXX X XXX XXX YES Demand Limit at 20 mA Loadshed Group Number Loadshed Demand Delta Maximum Loadshed Time Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Master/Slave Select Slave Address Lead/Lag Balance Select Lead/Lag Balance Delta Lag Start Delay Parallel Configuration 82 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Configuration Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD COMMENT Default: Single 0 = Single 1 = Dual Switch 2 = Dual CCN Occupied 3 = 4 to 20 mA Input (requires EMM) Default: Enable Default: 1.0 Range: 0.3 to 2 Default: 1 Range: 1 to 99 Default: 1 Range: 1 to 4 CLSP X Cooling Set Point Select SLCT RL.S CRMP SCHD Z.GN EN.A1 EN.A2 EN.B1 EN.B2 T.D.B OAT.B G.S.BC BC.AK ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL XX X.X YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Ramp Load Select Cooling Ramp Loading Schedule Number Deadband Multiplier SERV BCST SERVICE CONFIGURATION Enable Compressor A1 Enable Compressor A2 Enable Compressor B1 Enable Compressor B2 BROADCAST CONFIGURATION CCN Time/Date Broadcast CCN OAT Broadcast Global Schedule Broadcst CCN Broadcast Ack'er 83 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE TIME ITEM HH.MM MNTH DATE DOM DAY YEAR STR.M STR.W STR.D MIN.A STP.M STP.W STP.D MIN.S DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION TIME OF DAY XX.XX Hour and Minute MONTH, DATE, DAY, AND YEAR XX XX X Month of Year Day of Month Day of Week COMMENT Military (00:00 - 23:59) 1 - 12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.) Range: 01 -31 1 - 7 (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, etc.) DST HOL.L MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN HD.01 XXXX Year of Century DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME XX Month X Week X Day XX Minutes to Add XX Month XX Week XX Day XX Minutes to Subtract LOCAL HOLIDAY SCHEDULES HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 01 XX Holiday Start Month XX Start Day XX Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 02 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 03 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 04 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 05 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 06 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 07 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 08 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) Default: 4 Range 1- 12 Default: 1 Range 1- 5 Default: 7 Range 1- 7 Default: 60 Range 0 - 99 Default: 10 Range 1- 12 Default: 5 Range 1- 5 Default: 7 Range 1- 7 Default: 60 Range 0 - 99 HD.02 1 - 12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.) 01-31 HD.03 1 - 12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.) 01-31 HD.04 1 - 12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.) 01-31 HD.05 1 - 12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.) 01-31 HD.06 1 - 12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.) 01-31 HD.07 1 - 12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.) 01-31 HD.08 1 - 12 (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.) 01-31 84 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine etc.12 (1 = January. 2 = February. 2 = February.12 (1 = January. etc.) 01-31 HD. 2 = February.10 1 .12 (1 = January. 2 = February.) 01-31 HD. etc. etc.) 01-31 HD.16 1 .) 01-31 85 Downloaded from www.12 (1 = January.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 09 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 10 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 11 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 12 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 13 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 14 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 15 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 16 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 17 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 18 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 19 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) COMMENT 1 .18 1 . etc.) 01-31 HD.) 01-31 HD.15 1 .12 (1 = January.19 1 . etc. 2 = February.17 1 . 2 = February.) 01-31 HD. 2 = February.14 1 . etc. etc.) 01-31 HD.12 (1 = January. 2 = February. 2 = February.com manuals search engine .12 (1 = January. 2 = February. 2 = February. etc.13 1 . etc.Manualslib.12 (1 = January.12 (1 = January.12 (1 = January.12 (1 = January.11 1 .) 01-31 HD.) 01-31 HD.) 01-31 HD. etc.09 HD.12 1 . 2 = February.12 (1 = January.12 (1 = January. 2 = February.12 (1 = January. etc.24 1 .20 HD.12 (1 = January.12 (1 = January.com manuals search engine .) 01-31 HD. 2 = February.23 1 . etc.30 1 . etc.) 01-31 HD.26 1 .) 01-31 HD.) 01-31 86 Downloaded from www.12 (1 = January.12 (1 = January.) 01-31 HD.22 1 .12 (1 = January.) 01-31 HD. 2 = February.12 (1 = January. etc.21 1 .12 (1 = January.) 01-31 HD. 2 = February. etc.) 01-31 HD. 2 = February. etc.) 01-31 HD. etc.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN MON DAY LEN DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 20 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 21 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 22 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 23 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 24 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 25 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 26 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 27 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 28 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 29 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) HOLIDAY SCHEDULE 30 Holiday Start Month Start Day Duration (days) COMMENT 1 .) 01-31 HD.Manualslib. etc.12 (1 = January. etc. 2 = February.25 1 .28 1 . 2 = February. 2 = February. 2 = February. etc. etc.29 1 .) 01-31 HD.27 1 . 2 = February. 4 UNC.23:59) Military (00:00 .2 OCC.2 UNC.2 FRI.5 Military (00:00 .1 SUN.3 UNC.4 WED.3 FRI.2 HOL.1 MON.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE SCH.4 SUN.4 MON.2 THU.3 MON.1 SAT.3 SAT.2 WED.1 TUE.23:59) PER.2 TUE.com manuals search engine .5 THU.3 WED.3 HOL.2 Military (00:00 .1 FRI.5 SAT.4 THU.23:59) PER.1 HOL.5 HOL.4 HOL.5 TUE.3 SUN.2 MON.23:59) Military (00:00 .23:59) Military (00:00 .1 WED.1 UNC.L ITEM DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION Schedule Number 0 LOCAL OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE OCCUPANCY PERIOD 1 XX:XX Period Occupied Time XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time YES/NO Monday In Period YES/NO Tuesday In Period YES/NO Wednesday In Period YES/NO Thursday In Period YES/NO Friday In Period YES/NO Saturday In Period YES/NO Sunday In Period YES/NO Holiday In Period OCCUPANCY PERIOD 2 XX:XX Period Occupied Time XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time YES/NO Monday In Period YES/NO Tuesday In Period YES/NO Wednesday In Period YES/NO Thursday In Period YES/NO Friday In Period YES/NO Saturday In Period YES/NO Sunday In Period YES/NO Holiday In Period OCCUPANCY PERIOD 3 XX:XX Period Occupied Time XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time YES/NO Monday In Period YES/NO Tuesday In Period YES/NO Wednesday In Period YES/NO Thursday In Period YES/NO Friday In Period YES/NO Saturday In Period YES/NO Sunday In Period YES/NO Holiday In Period OCCUPANCY PERIOD 4 XX:XX Period Occupied Time XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time YES/NO Monday In Period YES/NO Tuesday In Period YES/NO Wednesday In Period YES/NO Thursday In Period YES/NO Friday In Period YES/NO Saturday In Period YES/NO Sunday In Period YES/NO Holiday In Period OCCUPANCY PERIOD 5 XX:XX Period Occupied Time XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time YES/NO Monday In Period YES/NO Tuesday In Period YES/NO Wednesday In Period YES/NO Thursday In Period YES/NO Friday In Period YES/NO Saturday In Period YES/NO Sunday In Period YES/NO Holiday In Period COMMENT PER.3 TUE.2 SUN.1 OCC.4 FRI.5 FRI.4 OCC.5 87 Downloaded from www.23:59) Military (00:00 .5 UNC.1 THU.5 SUN.3 Military (00:00 .23:59) Military (00:00 .5 WED.23:59) PER.N SCH.5 MON.4 SAT.4 Military (00:00 .4 TUE.Manualslib.1 OCC.2 SAT.3 OCC.23:59) Military (00:00 .3 THU.23:59) PER. 6 WED.6 SAT.8 THU.7 THU.8 TUE.8 OVR.23:59) PER.6 UNC.8 OVR Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours Default: 0 Range 0-4 hours User Entry 88 Downloaded from www.23:59) Military (00:00 .T OVR.7 SAT.8 MON.6 SUN.8 UNC.7 HOL.6 MON.7 MON.6 OCC.23:59) PER.8 WED.7 WED.APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Time Clock Mode and Sub-Mode Directory (cont) SUB-MODE ITEM OCC.OVR DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION OCCUPANCY PERIOD 6 XX:XX Period Occupied Time XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time YES/NO Monday In Period YES/NO Tuesday In Period YES/NO Wednesday In Period YES/NO Thursday In Period YES/NO Friday In Period YES/NO Saturday In Period YES/NO Sunday In Period YES/NO Holiday In Period OCCUPANCY PERIOD 7 XX:XX Period Occupied Time XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time YES/NO Monday In Period YES/NO Tuesday In Period YES/NO Wednesday In Period YES/NO Thursday In Period YES/NO Friday In Period YES/NO Saturday In Period YES/NO Sunday In Period YES/NO Holiday In Period OCCUPANCY PERIOD 8 XX:XX Period Occupied Time XX:XX Period Unoccupied Time YES/NO Monday In Period YES/NO Tuesday In Period YES/NO Wednesday In Period YES/NO Thursday In Period YES/NO Friday In Period YES/NO Saturday In Period YES/NO Sunday In Period YES/NO Holiday In Period SCHEDULE OVERRIDE X Timed Override Hours X Override Time Limit YES/NO Timed Override COMMENT Military (00:00 .6 THU.L T.7 OCC.7 UNC.7 FRI.7 SUN.6 FRI.Manualslib.6 Military (00:00 .com manuals search engine .6 HOL.23:59) Military (00:00 .23:59) PER.8 HOL.6 TUE.8 SUN.8 SAT.23:59) Military (00:00 .7 TUE.8 FRI.7 Military (00:00 . APPENDIX A — DISPLAY TABLES (cont) Operating Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE ITEM MD01 MD02 MD03 MD05 MD06 MD07 MD08 MD09 MD10 MD13 MD14 MD15 MD16 MD17 MD18 MD19 MD20 MD21 MD22 MD23 MD24 MD25 DISPLAY ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ITEM DESCRIPTION MODES CONTROLLING UNIT CSM Controlling Chiller WSM Controlling Chiller Master/Slave Control Ramp Load Limited Timed Override in effect Low Cooler Suction TempA Low Cooler Suction TempB Slow Change Override Minimum OFF time active Dual Set Point Temperature Reset Demand Limited Cooler Freeze Protection Low Temperature Cooling High Temperature Cooling Making Ice Storing Ice High SCT Circuit A High SCT Circuit B Minimum Comp.com manuals search engine . On Time Pump Off Delay Time Low Sound Mode COMMENT MODE Alarms Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE CRNT RCRN HIST ITEM AXXX TXXX PXXX YES/NO AXXX TXXX PXXX DISPLAY ITEM DESCRIPTION CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARMS Current Alarms 1-25 Reset All Current Alarms ALARM HISTORY Alarm History 1-20 Alarms are shown as AXXX Alerts are shown as TXXX COMMENT Alarms are hown as AXXX Alerts are shown as TXXX 89 Downloaded from www.Manualslib. n snnn.com manuals search engine .n nnn.n nnn.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES CCN DISPLAY TABLES — A_UNIT (General Unit Parameters) DESCRIPTION Control Mode VALUE 0 = Test 1 = Local Off 2 = CCN Off 3 = Clock Off 4 = Emergency Stop 5 = Local On 6 = CCN On 7 = Clock On 8 = Heat Enabled 9 = Pump Delay No/Yes Start/Stop No/Yes Normal/Alert/Alarm 0 to 100 No/Yes 0 to 100 0 to 99 –20 to 70 –20 to 70 snnn.Manualslib.n nnn.n nnn.n snnn. Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure Head Setpoint Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp EXV % Open Var Head Press Output Compr Return Gas Temp Discharge Gas Temp Suction Superheat Temp Spare 1 Temperature VALUE 0-100 0-100 nnn.n nnn.n snnn.n nnn nnn.n UNITS % % PSIG PSIG °F F F % milliamps F °F F °F POINT NAME CAPA_T CAPA_A DP_A SP_A HSP TMP_SCTA TMP_SSTA EXV_A VHP_ACT TMP_RGTA DISGAS SH_A SPR1_TMP N N N N N N N N N N N N N FORCIBLE 90 Downloaded from www.n Enable/Emstop 00:00 to 15:00 Off/On Off/On Open/Close Open/Close Open/Close No/Yes Heat/Cool UNITS POINT NAME STAT FORCIBLE N Occupied CCN Chiller Low Sound Active Alarm State Active Demand Limit Override Modes in Effect Percent Total Capacity Requested Stage Active Set Point Control Point Entering Fluid Temp Leaving Fluid Temp Emergency Stop Minutes Left for Start PUMPS Cooler Pump Relay 1 Cooler Pump Relay 2 Cooler Pump 1 Interlock Cooler Pump 2 Interlock Cooler Flow Switch Lead Pump Rotate Cooler Pumps Now Heat/Cool Select % % F F F F Enable minutes OCC CHIL_S_S LSACTIVE ALM DEM_LIM MODE CAP_T STAGE SP CTRL_PNT EWT LWT EMSTOP MIN_LEFT COOLPMP1 COOLPMP2 PMP1_FBK PMP2_FBK COOLFLOW LEADPUMP ROT_PUMP HC_SEL N Y N N Y N N N N Y N N Y N N N N N N Y Y N CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCA_AN (Circuit A Analog Parameters) DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES Percent Total Capacity Percent Available Cap.n nnn. n UNITS % % PSIG PSIG °F F F % milliamps F F °F POINT NAME CAPB_T CAPB_A DP_B SP_B HSP TMP_SCTB TMP_SSTB EXV_B VHP_ACT TMP_RGTB SH_B SPR2_TMP N N N N N N N N N N N N FORCIBLE CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCBDIO (Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs) DESCRIPTION CIRC.com manuals search engine . B DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor B1 Relay Compressor B2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Relay CIRC.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn. A DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor A1 Feedback Compressor A2 Feedback VALUE On/Off On/Off On/Off UNITS POINT NAME K_A1_RLY K_A2_RLY MLV_RLY N N N FORCIBLE On/Off On/Off K_A1_FBK K_A2_FBK N N CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCB_AN (Circuit B Analog Parameters) DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT B ANALOG VALUES Percent Total Capacity Percent Available Cap. B DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor B1 Feedback Compressor B2 Feedback VALUE On/Off On/Off On/Off UNITS POINT NAME K_B1_RLY K_B2_RLY MLV_RLY FORCIBLE N N N On/Off On/Off K_B1_FBK K_B2_FBK N N 91 Downloaded from www. Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure Head Setpoint Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp EXV % Open Var Head Press Output Compr Return Gas Temp Suction Superheat Temp Spare 2 Temperature VALUE 0-100 0-100 nnn.n snnn. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor A1 Relay Compressor A2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Relay CIRC.n snnn.n nnn nnn.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN DISPLAY TABLES — CIRCADIO (Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs) DESCRIPTION CIRC.Manualslib.n nnn. n F F F COOL_EWT COOL_LWT DUAL_LWT N N N nn. 1 = Pump 1.n mA F F RST_MA OAT SPT N Y Y nn. Brine No/Yes Dsable/Enable Off/On No/Yes No/Yes No/Yes 0 = Automatic.Manualslib.n snnn.n snnn.n snnn.n nn.com manuals search engine . 2 = Pump 2 0 to 10 10 to 2000 No/Yes 0/1 nn.n snnn.0 No 12 sec CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS1 (Options 1 Configuration) DESCRIPTION Cooler Fluid Minimum Load Vlv Select CSB Board Enable Cooler Pump Control Cooler Pump 1 Enable Cooler Pump 2 Enable Cooler Pmp Periodic Strt Cooler Pump Select Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly Pump Changeover Hours EMM Module Installed Cnd HX Typ: 0=RTPF 1=MCHX EXV MOP Set Point Config Approach Setpoint VALUE 1 = Water 2 = Med.n Off/On F HEAT_REQ DUAL_IN LWT_SP ICE_DONE N N N N CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — UNIT (Unit Configuration) DESCRIPTION Unit Size Compressor A1 Size Compressor A2 Size Compressor B1 Size Compressor B2 Size Suction Superheat Setpt Number of Fans Compressor A1 Digital? Maximum A1 Unload Time VALUE nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nn.n DEFAULT 1 No Enable Off No No No 0 1 100 No 1 minutes hours UNITS POINT NAME FLUIDTYP MLV_FLG CSB_ENA CPC PMP1_ENA PMP2_ENA PUMP_PST PMP_SLCT PUMP_DLY PMP_DLTA EMM_BRD COILTYPE MOP_SP IAPPROSP °F °F 92 Downloaded from www.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN DISPLAY TABLES — OPTIONS (Unit Parameters) DESCRIPTION FANS Fan 1 Relay Fan 2 Relay Cooler/Pump Heater UNIT ANALOG VALUES Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Leaving Fluid Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid TEMPERATURE RESET 4-20 mA Reset Signal Outside Air Temperature Space Temperature DEMAND LIMIT 4-20 mA Demand Signal Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 CCN Loadshed Signal VALUE Off/On Off/On Off/On UNITS POINT NAME FAN_1 FAN_2 COOL_HTR N N N FORCIBLE snnn.n Off/On Off/On 0 = Normal 1 = Redline 2 = Loadshed mA LMT_MA DMD_SW1 DMD_SW2 DL_STAT N N N N MISCELLANEOUS Heat Request Dual Setpoint Switch Cooler LWT Setpoint Ice Done Off/On Off/On snnn.n n No/Yes nn DEFAULT UNITS tons tons tons tons tons F POINT NAME SIZE SIZE_A1 SIZE_A2 SIZE_B1 SIZE_B2 SH_SP FAN_TYPE CPA1TYPE MAXULTME 9. 0 0.Manualslib.0 0.0 F F F REM_NO REM_FULL REM_DEG 0 to 125 0 to 125 –30 to 30 10. remote switch controlled 2 = Dual CCN occupancy 3 = 4-20 mA input Enable/Dsable Cool/Heat 2 to 60 0 to 15 1.0 Dsable 0 00:00 00:00 100 F min RAMP_EBL HEATCOOL LCW_LMT DELAY Z_GAIN ICE_CNFG LS_MODE LS_START LS_END LS_LIMIT % CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — SCHEDOVR (Timed Override Setup) DESCRIPTION Schedule Number Override Time Limit Timed Override Hours Timed Override VALUE 0 to 99 0 to 4 0 to 4 No/Yes DEFAULT 1 0 0 No UNITS hours hours POINT NAME SCHEDNUM OTL OVR_EXT TIMEOVER CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — RESETCON (Temperature Reset and Demand Limit) DESCRIPTION COOLING RESET Cooling Reset Type VALUE 0 = No Reset 1 = 4-20 mA input 2 = External temp – OAT 3 = Return Fluid 4 = External temp .SPT –30 to 30 DEFAULT 0 UNITS POINT NAME CRST_TYP 4-20 MA RESET 4-20 – Degrees Reset REMOTE RESET Remote – No Reset Temp Remote – Full Reset Temp Remote – Degrees Reset RETURN TEMPERATURE RESET Return – No Reset Temp Return – Full Reset Temp Return – Degrees Reset DEMAND LIMIT Demand Limit Select 0.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — OPTIONS2 (Options 2 Configuration) DESCRIPTION Control Method Loading Sequence Select Lead/Lag Circuit Select Cooling Setpoint Select VALUE 0 = Switch 2 = Occupancy 3 = CCN 1 = Equal Loading 2 = Staged Loading 1 = Automatic 2 = Circuit A Leads 3 = Circuit B Leads 0 = Single 1 = Dual.0 0.com manuals search engine .0 F 420_DEG 0 to 125 0 to 125 –30 to 30 125.0 0 1.0 Enable/Dsable 0 = Disabled 1 = Fan only 2 = Capacity/Fans 00:00 to 23:59 00:00 to 23:59 0 to 100 DEFAULT 0 1 1 0 UNITS POINT NAME CONTROL SEQ_TYP LEAD_TYP CLSP_TYP Ramp Load Select Heat Cool Select High LCW Alert Limit Minutes off time Deadband Multiplier Ice Mode Enable Low Sound Mode Select Low Sound Start Time Low Sound End Time Low Sound Capacity Limit Enable Cool 60.0 to 4.0 F F F RTN_NO RTN_FULL RTN_DEG Demand Limit at 20 mA Loadshed Group Number Loadshed Demand Delta Maximum Loadshed Time Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 0 = None 1 = External switch input 2 = 4-20 mA input 3 = Loadshed 0 to 100 0 to 99 0 to 60 0 to 120 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 DMD_CTRL 100 0 0 60 80 50 % % minutes % % DMT20MA SHED_NUM SHED_DEL SHED_TIM DLSWSP1 DLSWSP2 93 Downloaded from www.0 0. 0 1596/2500 200 0 0 1596/2500 167 Bipolar 115 10 5 10 10 10 10 UNITS % % steps steps % steps steps steps °F % % % % % secs POINT NAME EXVASTRT EXVAMINP EVXARANG EXVARATE EXVAPOSF EXVAMINS EXVAMAXS EXVAOVRS EXVATYPE HIGH_SCT EXV_HSCT EXVDISCR EXV_AFAN EXV_MFAN EXV_SLAG DELAYLAG CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVBCONF (EXV Circuit B Configuration) DESCRIPTION EXV Circ.0 UNITS POINT NAME MM_SLCT HP_PGAIN HP_IGAIN HP_DGAIN MIN_VHP % 94 Downloaded from www.n nnn.n nnnnn nnnnn nnnn.n nnnnn nnnnn nnnn.n nnn.com manuals search engine .nn nnnnn nnnnn nnnnn nnn DEFAULT 50.Fan Adding Pre-Close EXV . B Min Position EXVB Steps in Range EXVB Steps Per Second EXVB Fail Position in % EXVB Minimum Steps EXVB Maximum Steps EXVB Overrun Steps EXVB Stepper Type VALUE nnn.1 0.n nnn.n nnn DEFAULT 50.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn. B Start Pos EXV Circ.n nnn.0 5. A Min Position EXVA Steps in Range EXVA Steps Per Second EXVA Fail Position in % EXVA Minimum Steps EXVA Maximum Steps EXVA Overrun Steps EXVA Stepper Type High SCT Threshold Open EXV X% on 2nd Comp Open EXV X% on DISCRSOL Pre-Open EXV .n DEFAULT No 1.n nnn. A Start Pos EXV Circ.0 8.Lag Shut Lag Start Delay VALUE nnn.0 0.0 1596/2500 200 0 0 1596/2500 167 Bipolar UNITS % % steps steps % steps steps steps POINT NAME EXVBSTRT EXVBMINP EVXBRANG EXVBRATE EXVBPOSF EXVBMINS EXVBMAXS EXVBOVRS EXVBTYPE CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — MM_CONF (Motormaster Configuration) DESCRIPTION Motormaster Select Head Pressure P Gain Head Pressure I Gain Head Pressure D Gain Minimum Fan Speed VALUE No/Yes nnn.n nnn.Manualslib.n nnn.nn nnnnn nnnnn nnnnn nnn nnn.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DUALCHIL (Dual Chiller Configuration Settings) DESCRIPTION LEAD/LAG Lead/Lag Chiller Enable Master/Slave Select Slave Address Lead/Lag Balance Select Lead/Lag Balance Delta Lag Start Delay Parallel Configuration VALUE Enable/Dsable Master/Slave 0 to 239 0 = None 40 to 400 0 to 30 Yes DEFAULT Dsable Master 2 0 168 5 Yes UNITS POINT NAME LL_ENA MS_SEL SLV_ADDR LL_BAL LL_BAL_D LL_DELAY PARALLEL hours minutes CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — DISPLAY (Marquee Display SETUP) DESCRIPTION Service Password Password Enable Metric Display Language Selection VALUE nnnn Enable/Disable Off/On 0 = ENGLISH 1 = FRANCAIS 2 = ESPANOL 3 = PORTUGUES DEFAULT 1111 Enable Off 0 UNITS POINT NAME PASSWORD PASS_EBL DISPUNIT LANGUAGE CCN CONFIGURATION TABLES — EXVACONF (EXV Circuit A Configuration) DESCRIPTION EXV Circ.0 8.Fan Sub Pre-Close EXV . 0 UNITS F F F POINT NAME CSP1 CSP2 CSP3 0.0 34.Manualslib.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN SERVICE TABLES — SERVICE DESCRIPTION SERVICE Brine Freeze Point Pump Service Interval COMPRESSOR ENABLE Enable Compressor A1 Enable Compressor A2 Enable Compressor B1 Enable Compressor B2 VALUE nnn.com manuals search engine .n nn.2 to 2.0 –20 to 34 1.n nnn.0 32.0 F F F F F F CRAMP BRN_FRZ HSP FANONSP FANOFFSP FSTGDLTA B_FANOFF CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRA_EXV DESCRIPTION EXV % Open Circuit A Approach Approach Setpoint EXVA Override Suction Superheat Temp Active Superheat Setpt Active MOP Setpt Cir A EXV Position Limit VALUE nnn nnn.0 44.n nnnnn nnn.n nnnnn Disable/Enable Disable/Enable Disable/Enable Disable/Enable DEFAULT UNITS F hours POINT NAME BRN_FRZ SI_PUMPS ENABLEA1 ENABLEA2 ENABLEB1 ENABLEB2 CCN SETPOINT TABLES — SETPOINT DESCRIPTION COOLING Cooling Setpoint 1 Cooling Setpoint 2 ICE Setpoint RAMP LOADING Cooling Ramp Loading Brine Freeze Point Head Setpoint Fan On Set Point Fan Off Set Point Fan Stage Delta Base Fan Off Delta Temp VALUE –20 to 70 –20 to 70 –20 to 32 DEFAULT 44.n nn.n nnn DEFAULT UNITS % delta F delta F delta F delta F delta F % POINT NAME EXV_A CIRA_APP APPRA_SP EXVAOVRR SH_A ACTSH_SP ACMOP_SP PLMA 95 Downloaded from www. n nn.n nnn DEFAULT UNITS % delta F delta F delta F delta F delta F % POINT NAME EXV_B CIRB_APP APPRB_SP EXVBOVRR SH_B ACTSH_SP ACMOP_SP PLMB CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — STRTHOUR DESCRIPTION Machine Operating Hours Machine Starts Circuit A Run Hours Compressor A1 Run Hours Compressor A2 Run Hours Circuit B Run Hours Compressor B1 Run Hours Compressor B2 Run Hours Circuit A Starts Compressor A1 Starts Compressor A2 Starts Circuit B Starts Compressor B1 Starts Compressor B2 Starts PUMP HOURS Pump 1 Run Hours Pump 2 Run Hours VALUE nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn nnnnnn UNITS hours POINT NAME HR_MACH CY_MACH HR_CIRA HR_A1 HR_A2 HR_CIRB HR_B1 HR_B2 CY_CIRA CY_A1 CY_A2 CY_CIRB CY_B1 CY_B2 hours hours hours hours hours hours nnnnnn nnnnnn hours hours HR_PUMP1 HR_PUMP2 CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CURRMODS DESCRIPTION CSM controlling Chiller WSM controlling Chiller Master/Slave control Ramp Load Limited Timed Override in effect Low Cooler Suction TempA Low Cooler Suction TempB Slow Change Override Minimum OFF time active Dual Setpoint Temperature Reset Demand/Sound Limited Cooler Freeze Protection Low Temperature Cooling High Temperature Cooling Making ICE Storing ICE High SCT Circuit A High SCT Circuit B Minimum Comp.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — CIRB_EXV DESCRIPTION EXV % Open Circuit B Approach Approach Setpoint EXVB Override Suction Superheat Temp Active Superheat Setpt Active MOP Setpt Cir B EXV Position Limit VALUE nnn nnn.Manualslib. On Time Pump Off Delay Time Low Sound Mode VALUE On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off MODE_1 MODE_2 MODE_3 MODE_5 MODE_6 MODE_7 MODE_8 MODE_9 MODE_10 MODE_13 MODE_14 MODE_15 MODE_16 MODE_17 MODE_18 MODE_19 MODE_20 MODE_21 MODE_22 MODE_23 MODE_24 MODE_25 POINT NAME 96 Downloaded from www.n nn.com manuals search engine .n nnn.n nnnnn nnn. n snnn. On Time VALUE snnn.n On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off UNITS POINT NAME SMZ CTRL_PNT EWT LWT MODE_5 MODE_9 MODE_16 MODE_17 MODE_18 MODE_23 F F F 97 Downloaded from www.n snnn.Manualslib.n snnn.com manuals search engine .APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — ALARMS DESCRIPTION Active Alarm #1 Active Alarm #2 Active Alarm #3 Active Alarm #4 Active Alarm #5 Active Alarm #6 Active Alarm #7 Active Alarm #8 Active Alarm #9 Active Alarm #10 Active Alarm #11 Active Alarm #12 Active Alarm #13 Active Alarm #14 Active Alarm #15 Active Alarm #16 Active Alarm #17 Active Alarm #18 Active Alarm #19 Active Alarm #20 Active Alarm #21 Active Alarm #22 Active Alarm #23 Active Alarm #24 Active Alarm #25 VALUE Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx Axxx or Txxx POINT NAME ALARM01C ALARM02C ALARM03C ALARM04C ALARM05C ALARM06C ALARM07C ALARM08C ALARM09C ALARM10C ALARM11C ALARM12C ALARM13C ALARM14C ALARM15C ALARM16C ALARM17C ALARM18C ALARM19C ALARM20C ALARM21C ALARM22C ALARM23C ALARM24C ALARM25C CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — VERSIONS DESCRIPTION EXV AUX MBB EMM MARQUEE NAVIGATOR VERSION CESR131172CESR131333CESR131460CESR131174CESR131171CESR130227VALUE nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn nn-nn CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — LOADFACT DESCRIPTION CAPACITY CONTROL Load/Unload Factor Control Point Entering Fluid Temp Leaving Fluid Temp Ramp Load Limited Slow Change Override Cooler Freeze Protection Low Temperature Cooling High Temperature Cooling Minimum Comp. Date Coil Cleaning Maint. Date Strainer Maint.com manuals search engine . Date VALUE nnnnnn nnnnnn Yes/No mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm UNITS hours hours POINT NAME SI_STRNR ST_CDOWN ST_MAINT STRN_PM0 STRN_PM1 STRN_PM2 STRN_PM3 STRN_PM4 CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-COIL DESCRIPTION Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter Coil Service Countdown Coil Cleaning Maint.Date VALUE nnnnnn nnnnnn Yes/No mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm UNITS hours hours POINT NAME SI_COIL CL_CDOWN CL_MAINT COIL_PM0 COIL_PM1 COIL_PM2 COIL_PM3 COIL_PM4 CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — TESTMODE DESCRIPTION Service Test Mode Compressor A1 Relay Compressor A2 Relay Compressor B1 Relay Compressor B2 Relay Fan 1 Relay Fan 2 Relay Cooler Pump Relay 1 Cooler Pump Relay 2 Comp A1 Unload Time Minimum Load Valve Relay Remote Alarm Relay EXV % Open EXV % Open VALUE On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off nn On/Off On/Off nn nn UNITS POINT NAME NET_CTRL S_A1_RLY S_A2_RLY S_B1_RLY S_B2_RLY S_FAN_1 S_FAN_2 S_CLPMP1 S_CLPMP2 S_A1ULTM S_MLV S_ALM S_EXV_A S_EXV_B sec % % 98 Downloaded from www.Date Coil Cleaning Maint.Done Coil Cleaning Maint. Done Strainer Maint.Date Coil Cleaning Maint. Date Strainer Maint.Date Coil Cleaning Maint. Date Strainer Maint.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-PUMP DESCRIPTION Pump Service Interval Pump 1 Service Countdown Pump 1 Maintenance Done Pump 2 Service Countdown Pump 2 Maintenance Done Pump 1 Maintenance Date Pump 1 Maintenance Date Pump 1 Maintenance Date Pump 1 Maintenance Date Pump 1 Maintenance Date Pump 2 Maintenance Date Pump 2 Maintenance Date Pump 2 Maintenance Date Pump 2 Maintenance Date Pump 2 Maintenance Date VALUE nnnnnn nnnnnn Yes/No nnnnnn Yes/No mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm mm/dd/yy hh:mm UNITS hours hours hours POINT NAME SI_PUMPS P1_CDOWN P1_MAINT P2_CDOWN P2_MAINT PMP1_PM0 PMP1_PM1 PMP1_PM2 PMP1_PM3 PMP1_PM4 PMP2_PM0 PMP2_PM1 PMP2_PM2 PMP2_PM3 PMP2_PM4 CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — PM-STRN DESCRIPTION Strainer Srvc Interval Strainer Srvc Countdown Strainer Maint. Date Strainer Maint.Manualslib. n nnn.n On/Off On/Off Open/Closed Open/Closed nnn.n On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off nnn nnn nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.com manuals search engine .n nnn nnn nnn nnn On/Off F F UNITS % % psig psig F F F F F ^F POINT NAME CAPA_T CAPA_A DP_A SP_A HSP TMP_SCTA TMP_SSTA TMP_RGTA DISGAS SH_A K_A1_RLY K_A2_RLY MLV_RLY K_A1_FBK K_A2_FBK CAPB_T CAPB_A DP_B SP_B HSP TMP_SCTB TMP_SSTB TMP_RGTB SH_B K_B1_RLY K_B2_RLY MLV_RLY K_B1_FBK K_B2_FBK FAN_1 FAN_2 OAT SPT COOLPMP1 COOLPMP2 PMP1_FBK PMP2_FBK COOL_EWT COOL_LWT SIZE_A1 SIZE_A2 SIZE_B1 SIZE_B2 COOLFLOW % % psig psig F F F F ^F F F tons tons tons tons 99 Downloaded from www. Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure Head Setpoint Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp Compr Return Gas Temp Discharge Gas Temp Suction Superheat Temp Compressor A1 Relay Compressor A2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Relay Compressor A1 Feedback Compressor A2 Feedback Percent Total Capacity Percent Available Cap.n nnn.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — RUNTEST DESCRIPTION Percent Total Capacity Percent Available Cap.n nnn.Manualslib.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off nnn.n nnn.n nnn. Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure Head Setpoint Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp Compr Return Gas Temp Suction Superheat Temp Compressor B1 Relay Compressor B2 Relay Minimum Load Valve Relay Compressor B1 Feedback Compressor B2 Feedback Fan 1 Relay Fan 2 Relay Outside Air Temperature Space Temperature Cooler Pump Relay 1 Cooler Pump Relay 2 Cooler Pump 1 Interlock Cooler Pump 2 Interlock Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Leaving Fluid Compressor A1 Size Compressor A2 Size Compressor B1 Size Compressor B2 Size Cooler Flow Switch VALUE nnn nnn nnn.n nnn. com manuals search engine .n Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No 0-100 0-100 % % UNITS POINT NAME DC_LINK MC_ROLE SC_ROLE F F F F F F F F % % LEAD_CP LAG_CP CTRL_PNT COOLEWTS COOLLWTS COOL_EWT COOL_LWT DUAL_LWT CAP_A CAP_A_S LAGDELAY SMZ SMZSLAVE LEADSMZC LAG_SMZC LAG_OFF DCLDCAPL DCLGCAPL 100 Downloaded from www.n snnn. Lead Chiller.Cap.Capacity Percent Avail.n 0-100 0-100 hh:mm snnn. Lag Chiller snnn.n snnn. Lead Chiller.n snnn.APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont) CCN MAINTENANCE TABLES — DUALCHIL DESCRIPTION Dual Chiller Link Good? Master Chiller Role Slave Chiller Role Lead Chiller Ctrl Point Lag Chiller Ctrl Point Control Point Cool EnteringFluid-Slave Cool Leaving Fluid-Slave Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Leaving Fluid Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid Percent Avail.n snnn.n snnn. Lag Chiller Stand Alone.Manualslib.n snnn.Slave Lag Start Delay Time Load/Unload Factor Load/Unload Factor-Slave Lead SMZ Clear Commanded Lag SMZ Clear Commanded Lag Commanded Off? Dual Chill Lead CapLimit Dual Chill Lag CapLimit VALUE Yes/No Stand Alone.n snnn.n snnn. Manualslib.5 HP 101 Downloaded from www. D.6 3.5 HP 3.2 3.3 6.4 2.0 HP 7.0 7.0 HP 5.com manuals search engine .7 2.4 5. 6.0 HP 4. B 2.6 2.1 13.5 22.8 2.6 4.APPENDIX C — FACTORY SETTINGS FOR PUMP AND MANUAL STARTERS PUMP OPTION 1.8 4.8 11. 9 1.5 5.0 5. 8 PUMP SIZE 1.6 8.0 2.3 14.0 1.0 8.3 2. C 3.4 3. F 5.4 9. G 7.0 HP UNIT VOLTAGE V-Hz (3 Ph) 208/230-60 380-60 460-60 575-60 208/230-60 380-60 460-60 575-60 208/230-60 380-60 460-60 575-60 208/230-60 380-60 460-60 575-60 208/230-60 380-60 460-60 575-60 208/230-60 380-60 460-60 575-60 OVERLOAD SETTING 4. The controller reads the address each time power is applied to it. By default. If the UPC Open controller is powered. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. point the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on the Ones (1's) switch to 5. TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is unique on the BACnet* network. As an example in Fig. The UPC Open controller is mounted in the main control box per unit components arrangement diagrams. set the controller's address.com manuals search engine 23 23 01 . and Air Conditioning Engineers). a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device Instance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of 1610120. Refrigerating. and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones digit. pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Gnd and HOT. Perform the following procedure to assign an address: 1. This Device Instance MUST be unique for the complete BACnet system in which the UPC Open controller is installed. B. A and B). 102 Downloaded from www. The Device Instance is auto generated by default and is derived by adding the MAC address to the end of the Network Number.Manualslib. A — UPC Open Controller * Sponsored by ASHRAE (American Society of Heating. B — Address Rotary Switches BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS — The UPC Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address. Optional BACnet Communications Wiring — 7 8 9 0 5 5 1 2 34 1 10's 7 8 6 9 0 2 34 1's Fig. 2. but it can be changed using i-Vu® Tools or BACView device.APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING The following section is used to configure the UPC Open controller which is used when the BACnet communications option is selected. BT485 TERMINATOR BACNET CONNECTION (BAS PORT) Tx1 LED Rx1 LED 6 POWER LED Tx2 LED Rx2 LED EIA-485 JUMPERS 45 8 67 9 BACNET BAUD RATE DIP SWITCHES ADDRESS ROTARY SWITCHES RUN LED ERROR LED 01 45 8 67 9 Fig. The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101. if the controller’s address is 25. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens digit of the address. Table A — SW3 Protocol Switch Settings for MS/TP DS8 Off DS7 Off DS6 Off DS5 Off DS4 On DS3 Off Fig.4 kbps. Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last controller on a network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions due to echoing. No Parity. pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's power terminals labeled Gnd and HOT.8k bps). or 76.” Key. The controller reads the DIP Switches and jumpers each time power is applied to it. and Shield.8 kbps. Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are set to EIA-485 and 2W.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP. 4.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP. A.2k. low-capacitance. Verify communication with the network by viewing a module status report. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches set for 76.APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont) CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/ TP — Use the same baud rate and communication settings for all controllers on the network segment. and E. The maximum length is 2000 ft. See Fig.com manuals search engine .4k.Manualslib. The example in Fig. To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network: 1. or 76. Net -. 19. D and Table B.600 19. Table B — Baud Selection Table BAUD RATE 9. 38. 3.800 DS2 Off On Off On DS1 Off Off On On WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/ TP NETWORK — The UPC Open controller communicates using BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications at 9600 bps. 2. To perform a module status report using the BACview keypad/display unit. Wire specifications for the cable are 22 AWG (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG.” Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485. Check the communications wiring for shorts and grounds. Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appropriate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600. stranded. twisted.2 kbps. shielded copper wire. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's BAS Port. and 1 Stop bit for this protocol's communications. D. C — DIP Switches Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a daisy-chain configuration. 5. D — Network Wiring 103 Downloaded from www. 38. press and hold the “FN” key then press the “. See Fig. The UPC Open controller is fixed at 8 data bits. Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.200 38.” See Table A.400 76. If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s screw terminals labeled Net +. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC Open controller's power terminals if they are not currently connected. Fig. NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network segment. 19. 6576 mm) O. NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with it. TC UL — — — — — — — — LEGEND American Wire Gage Class 2 Plenum Cable Direct Current Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer National Electrical Code Outside Diameter Tinned Copper Underwriters Laboratories RECOMMMENDATION Single twisted pair.Manualslib.D. To order a BT485 terminator. Black/White 2 in.021 in.445 mm) O. Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0. MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS — Recommendations are shown in Tables C and D.D.015 in.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0. 15.175 in.D.com manuals search engine .5334 mm) wall 0. and it is appropriate for use in applications where the user is concerned about abrasion. E — BT485 Terminator Installation To install a BT485 terminator.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal 12.254 mm) wall 0. TC foam FEP. push the BT485 terminator on to the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector. The Halar specification has a higher temperature rating and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard specification. or better 104 Downloaded from www. low capacitance. (3. (0.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor 100 Ohms nominal 12 lb/1000 feet (17. consult Commercial Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.144 in. The wire jacket and UL temperature rating specifications list two acceptable alternatives. The Halar jacket is also less likely to crack in extremely low temperatures.9 kg/km) SmokeGard 167°F (75°C) Halar -40 to 302°F (-40 to 150°C) 300 Vac. (0.010 in. power limited UL: NEC CL2P. (50. plenum rated cable 22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated) Foamed FEP 0. (4. Table C — MS/TP Wiring Recommendations SPECIFICATION Cable Conductor Insulation Color Code Twist Lay Shielding Jacket DC Resistance Capacitance Characteristic Impedance Weight UL Temperature Rating Voltage Listing AWG CL2P DC FEP NEC O. CL2P. 22 AWG (7x30). (1.524 mm) O.381 mm) wall 0.APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont) Fig.D.060 in. NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum signal integrity. (0. See MS/TP Installation Guide for specifications. CL2P. CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER'S PROPERTIES — The UPC Open device and ComfortLink control must be set to the same CCN Address (Element) num- ber and CCN Bus number. Navigation: BACview→CCN Home: Element Comm Stat Element: 1 Bus: 0 Fig. If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are required.APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont) Table D — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors WIRING SPECIFICATIONS Wire Type Description RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS Connect Air Contractors Belden RMCORP Wire and Cable International W221P-22227 W241P-2000F W184C-2099BLB — 82841 6302UE 25160PV 25120-OR 21450 CLP0520LC — CLP0442 22 AWG. Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address) Configuration→CCN→CCN.com manuals search engine . These items let the user access the controller network information. both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations must be changed. F — BACview6 Device Connection 105 Downloaded from www. Rnet 4 conductor. These configurations can be changed using the scrolling marquee display or accessory Navigator handheld device. MS/TP Network (RS-485) 24 AWG. These configurations can be changed using the accessory BACview6 display. The factory default settings for CCN Element and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively. single twisted shielded pair.Manualslib. 18 AWG. The laptop will require an additional USB link cable for connection.B (CCN Bus Number) The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. plenum rated. low capacitance. consult Commercial Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices. F. unshielded. plenum rated. The following configurations are used to set the CCN Address and Bus number in the ComfortLink control. TC foam FEP. These are accessory items and do not come with the UPC Open controller. single twisted shielded pair. See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instructions on connecting and using the BACview6 device. The BACview6 unit connects to the local access port on the UPC Open controller. plenum rated. AWG CL2P CMP FEP TC — — — — — LEGEND American Wire Gage Class 2 Plenum Cable Communications Plenum Rated Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer Tinned Copper LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The user can use a BACview6 handheld keypad display unit or the Virtual BACview software as a local user interface to an Open controller. TC foam FEP. low capacitance. See MS/TP Installation Guide for specifications. See Fig. CMP. CL2P. To order a BACview6 Handheld (BV6H). The BACview software must be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local access port on the UPC Open controller. there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2. Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment. alternating with Run LED STATUS Normal Five minute auto-restart delay after system error Controller has just been formatted Controller is alone on the network Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted Exec start-up aborted. See Table F. The LEDs should reflect communication traffic based on the baud rate set. Table E — LED Status Indicators LED Power Rx Tx Run Error STATUS Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. making note of the battery's polarity. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition that caused the fault returns to normal. The higher the baud rate the more solid the LEDs become. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on the incoming power and network connections. there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.Manualslib. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/ Standby application is being used. See Fig. Remove the battery from the controller. the UPC Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger.000 hours of data retention during power outages. See Table F. all chillers and UPC Open's CCN element numbers must be changed to a unique number in order to follow CCN specifications. time. REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY — The UPC Open controller's 10-year lithium CR2032 battery provides a minimum of 10. there can only be a maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a CCN bus. Insert the new battery. For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration. Lights based on controller status. Table F — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication RUN LED 2 flashes per second 2 flashes per second 2 flashes per second 2 flashes per second 2 flashes per second 5 flashes per second 5 flashes per second 7 flashes per second 14 flashes per second ERROR LED Off 2 flashes. the UPC Open defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/ Lag/Standby application is used. alternating with Run LED 3 flashes. then off 1 flash per second On On Off 7 flashes per second. and trend data will be lost. COMMUNICATION LEDS — The LEDs indicate if the controller is communicating with the devices on the network. Refer to Appendix B for additional information on CCN point name. Lights based on controller status. NETWORK POINTS LIST — The points list for the controller is shown in Table G. Boot is running Firmware transfer in progress. or the date. contact Carrier Technical Support. For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration.APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont) If the UPC Open is used with the chiller application of Lead/Lag/Standby. Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment. matching the battery's polarity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open controller. See Tables E and F. TROUBLESHOOTING — If there are problems wiring or addressing the UPC Open controller. alternating with Run LED 14 flashes per second. then the Carrier technician must change the configuration to only one CCN Time Broadcaster on the CCN bus. Boot is running Ten second recovery period after brownout Brownout 106 Downloaded from www. then the Carrier technician must change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger on the CCN bus. IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open when replacing the battery. In this application.com manuals search engine . A for location of LEDs on UPC Open module. 0 °F °F min 1 1.100 1 = Normal 2 = Alert 3 = Alarm Start/Stop hr hr °F °F hr hr hr hr 1 = Test 2 = Local Off 3 = CCN Off 4 = Clock Off 5 = Emergency Stop 6= Local On 7 = CCN On 8 = Clock On 9 = Heat Enabled 10 = Pump Delay -20 .0 44.Manualslib.65535 DEFAULT VALUE RANGE BACNET OBJECT ID AV:36 AV:33 AV:2 AV:4 MSV:1 BV:4 AV:37 AV:59 AV:65 AV:62 AV:68 BV:54 AV:50 AV:49 AV:73 AV:20 AV:28 BV:16 BV:13 AV:60 AV:66 BV:17 BV:14 AV:61 AV:67 BV:20 BV:18 AV:63 AV:69 BV:21 BV:19 AV:64 AV:70 BACNET OBJECT NAME lmt_ma_1 rst_ma_1 dem_lim_1 sp_1 alm_msv_1 chil_s_s_1 dl_stat_1 hr_cira_1 cy_cira_1 hr_cirb_1 cy_cirb_1 cl_maint_1 si_coil_1 cl_cdown_1 a1unltme_1 tmp_rgta_1 tmp_rgtb_1 k_a1_fbk_1 k_a1_rly_1 hr_a1_1 cy_a1_1 k_a2_fbk_1 k_a2_rly_1 hr_a2_1 cy_a2_1 k_b1_fbk_1 k_b1_rly_1 hr_b1_1 cy_b1_1 k_b2_fbk_1 k_b2_rly_1 hr_b2_1 cy_b2_1 100 0 .com manuals search engine .70 Control Mode CONTROL R MSV:2 stat_msv_1 Control Point Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Flow Switch Cooler Freeze Protection Cooler Leaving Fluid Cooler LWT Setpoint Cooler Pump 1 Interlock Cooler Pump 2 Interlock Cooler Pump Relay 1 Cooler Pump Relay 2 Cooler Pump Select Cooler Pump Shutdown Dly Cooler/Pump Heater Cooling Ramp Loading Cooling Setpoint 1 R W LEGEND — Read — Write CTRL_PNT COOL_EWT COOLFLOW MODE_16 COOL_LWT LWT_SP PMP1_FBK PMP2_FBK COOLPMP1 COOLPMP2 PMP_SLCT PUMP_DLY COOL_HTR CRAMP CSP1 R/W R R R R R R R R R R R/W R R/W R/W °F °F 44.10 0.0 -20 .0 0 .APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont) Table G — Network Points List POINT DESCRIPTION 4-20 ma Demand Signal 4-20 ma Reset Signal Active Demand Limit Active Setpoint Alarm State CCN Chiller CCN Loadshed Signal Circuit A Run Hours Circuit A Starts Circuit B Run Hours Circuit B Starts Coil Cleaning Maint.Done Coil Cleaning Srvc Inter Coil Service Countdown Comp A1 Unload Time Compr Return Gas Temp Compr Return Gas Temp Compressor A1 Feedback Compressor A1 Relay Compressor A1 Run Hours Compressor A1 Starts Compressor A2 Feedback Compressor A2 Relay Compressor A2 Run Hours Compressor A2 Starts Compressor B1 Feedback Compressor B1 Relay Compressor B1 Run Hours Compressor B1 Starts Compressor B2 Feedback Compressor B2 Relay Compressor B2 Run Hours Compressor B2 Starts CCN POINT NAME LMT_MA RST_MA DEM_LIM SP ALM CHIL_S_S DL_STAT HR_CIRA CY_CIRA HR_CIRB CY_CIRB CL_MAINT SI_COIL CL_CDOWN A1UNLTME TMP_RGTA TMP_RGTB K_A1_FBK K_A1_RLY HR_A1 CY_A1 K_A2_FBK K_A2_RLY HR_A2 CY_A2 K_B1_FBK K_B1_RLY HR_B1 CY_B1 K_B2_FBK K_B2_RLY HR_B2 CY_B2 READ/ UNITS WRITE R mA R °F R/W % R °F R R/W R R R R R R/W R/W R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Start hr hr No 8760 Yes/No 0 .70 °F AV:5 AV:30 BV:11 BV:42 AV:31 AV:38 BV:9 BV:10 BV:7 BV:8 AV:40 AV:41 BV:24 AV:56 AV:53 ctrl_pnt_1 cool_ewt_1 coolflow_1 mode_16_1 cool_lwt_1 lwt_sp_1 pmp1_fbk_1 pmp2_fbk_1 coolpmp1_1 coolpmp2_1 pmp_slct_1 pump_dly_1 cool_htr_1 cramp_1 csp1_1 107 Downloaded from www.2.2 . On Time Minimum Load Valve Relay Minimum OFF Time Active Minutes Off Time Occupied Outside Air Temperature Override Modes in Effect Percent Available Cap.Prime Variable Loading Sequence Select Local Schedule Low Cooler Suction Temp A Low Cooler Suction Temp B Low Sound Active Low Sound Mode Low Temperature Cooling Machine Operating Hours Machine Starts Making ICE Master/Slave Control Minimum Comp.32 1 = Automatic 2 = Circuit A Leads 3 = Circuit B Leads °F °F hr min °F % % 0 0 .0 RANGE -20 .70 BACNET OBJECT ID AV:54 BV:30 AV:75 AV:76 AV:77 BV:25 BV:26 BV:41 AV:15 AV:13 AV:23 BV:39 BV:29 BV:2999 BV:58 BV:6 AV:6 AV:18 AV:27 BV:22 BV:23 AV:29 BV:28 BV:47 BV:48 BV:44 BV:27 AV:55 AV:43 MSV:6 AV:32 MSV:9 AV:7 AV:74 BV:1 BV:35 BV:36 BV:2 BV:51 BV:43 AV:57 AV:58 BV:45 BV:32 BV:49 BV:15 BV:38 AV:42 BV:3 AV:34 BV:5 AV:12 AV:22 BACNET OBJECT NAME csp2_1 mode_1_1 dmv_lvl_1_perct_1 dmv_lvl_2_perct_1 dmv_lvl_3_perct_1 dmd_sw1_1 dmd_sw2_1 mode_15_1 disgas_1 dp_a_1 dp_b_1 mode_13_1 dual_in_1 element_stat_1 comm_lost_alm_1 emstop_1 ewt_1 exv_a_1 exv_b_1 fan_1_1 fan_2_1 hsp_1 heat_req_1 mode_21_1 mode_22_1 mode_18_1 ice_done_1 csp3_1 lead_typ_1 lead_typ_msv_1 dual_lwt_1 leadpump_msv_1 lwt_1 seq_type_1 schedule_1 mode_7_1 mode_8_1 lsactive_1 mode_25_1 mode_17_1 hr_mach_1 cy_mach_1 mode_19_1 mode_3_1 mode_23_1 mlv_rly_1 mode_10_1 delay_1 occ_1 oat_1 mode_1 capa_a_1 capb_a_1 DMD_SW1 DMD_SW2 MODE_15 DISGAS DP_A DP_B MODE_13 DUAL_IN °F °F 32.0 1 -20 .com manuals search engine .APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont) Table G — Network Points List (cont) POINT DESCRIPTION Cooling Setpoint 2 CSM Controlling Chiller Demand Level 1 Demand Level 2 Demand Level 3 Demand Limit Switch 1 Demand Limit Switch 2 Demand/Sound Limited Discharge Gas Temp Discharge Pressure Discharge Pressure Dual Setpoint Dual Setpoint Switch Element Comm Status Element Communications Alarm Emergency Stop Entering Fluid Temp EXV % Open EXV % Open Fan 1 Relay Fan 2 Relay Head Setpoint Heat Request High SCT Circuit A High SCT Circuit B High Temperature Cooling Ice Done Ice Setpoint Lead/Lag Circuit Select Lead/Lag Circuit Select Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid Leadpump Leaving Fluid Temp . R W LEGEND — Read — Write POINT NAME CSP2 MODE_1 READ/ UNITS WRITE R/W °F R R % R % R % R R R R °F R psig R psig R R R R EMSTOP EWT EXV_A EXV_B FAN_1 FAN_2 HSP HEAT_REQ MODE_21 MODE_22 MODE_18 ICE_DONE CSP3 LEAD_TYP LEAD_TYP DUAL_LWT LEADPUMP LWT SEQ_TYPE MODE_7 MODE_8 LSACTIVE MODE_25 MODE_17 HR_MACH CY_MACH MODE_19 MODE_3 MODE_23 MLV_RLY MODE_10 DELAY OCC OAT MODE CAP_A CAPB_A R/W R R R R R R R R R R R R/W R/W R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R/W R R R R R Enabled °F % % Enabled/Emstop DEFAULT VALUE 44.Manualslib.15 108 Downloaded from www. Percent Available Cap. com manuals search engine .2000 0 . Done Strainer Srvc Countdown Strainer Srvc Interval Suction Pressure Suction Pressure Suction Superheat Temp Suction Superheat Temp System Cooling Demand Level System Demand Limiting Temperature Reset Timed Override In Effect User Defined Analog 1 User Defined Analog 2 User Defined Analog 3 User Defined Analog 4 User Defined Analog 5 User Defined Binary 1 User Defined Binary 2 User Defined Binary 3 User Defined Binary 4 User Defined Binary 5 Var Head Press Output WSM Controlling Chiller R W LEGEND — Read — Write POINT NAME CAP_T CAPA_T CAPB_T P1_MAINT HR_PUMP1 P1_CDOWN P2_MAINT HR_PUMP2 P2_CDOWN PMP_DLTA MODE_24 SI_PUMPS MODE_5 STAGE ROT_PUMP TMP_SCTA TMP_SCTB TMP_SSTA TMP_SSTB MODE_9 SPT MODE_20 ST_MAINT ST_CDOWN SI_STRNR SP_A SP_B SH_A SH_B READ/ UNITS WRITE R % R % R % R/W R hr R hr R/W R hr R hr R/W hr R R/W hr R R R/W R °F R °F R °F R °F R R/W °F R R/W R hr R/W hr R psig R psig R °^F R °^F R MODE_14 MODE_6 R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R DEFAULT VALUE RANGE BACNET OBJECT ID AV:3 AV:11 AV:21 BV:52 AV:71 AV:46 BV:53 AV:72 AV:47 AV:39 BV:50 AV:48 BV:33 AV:9 BV:12 AV:16 AV:25 AV:17 AV:26 BV:37 AV:35 BV:46 BV:55 AV:52 AV:51 AV:14 AV:24 AV:44 AV:45 AV:9006 BV:57 BV:40 BV:34 AV:2901 AV:2902 AV:2903 AV:2904 AV:2905 BV:2911 BV:2912 BV:2913 BV:2914 BV:2915 AV:19 BV:31 BACNET OBJECT NAME cap_t_1 capa_t_1 capb_t_1 p1_maint_1 hr_pump1_1 p1_cdown_1 p2_maint_1 hr_pump2_1 p2_cdown_1 pmp_dlta_1 mode_24_1 si_pumps_1 mode_5_1 stage_1 rot_pump_1 tmp_scta_1 tmp_sctb_1 tmp_ssta_1 tmp_sstb_1 mode_9_1 spt_1 mode_20_1 st_maint_1 st_cdown_1 si_strnr_1 sp_a_1 sp_b_1 sh_a_1 sh_b_1 cool_demand_level_1 dem_lmt_act_1 mode_14_1 mode_6_1 user_analog_1_1 user_analog_2_1 user_analog_3_1 user_analog_4_1 user_analog_5_1 user_binary_1_1 user_binary_2_1 user_binary_3_1 user_binary_4_1 user_binary_5_1 vhp_act_1 mode_2_1 No Yes/No No Yes/No 500 8760 10 .0 .65535 VHP_ACT MODE_2 sq m sq m sq m sq m sq m sq m sq m sq m sq m sq m mA 109 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.APPENDIX D — OPTIONAL BACNET COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (cont) Table G — Network Points List (cont) POINT DESCRIPTION Percent Total Capacity Percent Total Capacity Percent Total Capacity Pump 1 Maintenance Done Pump 1 Run Hours Pump 1 Service Countdown Pump 2 Maintenance Done Pump 2 Run Hours Pump 2 Service Countdown Pump Changeover Hours Pump Off Delay Time Pump Service Interval Ramp Load Limited Requested Stage Rotate Cooler Pumps Now Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Condensing Tmp Saturated Suction Temp Saturated Suction Temp Slow Change Override Space Temperature Storing ICE Strainer Maint.245 Yes/No 0 .65535 No No/Yes 8760 No 8760 -40. Run all compressors and ensure proper operation. None. Ensure operation of unit flow switch. None. Check all connections for leaks. Perform an Automated Controls test. 110 Downloaded from www. None. Measure current to each compressor and inspect contactors. Check approach on unit to determine if tubes need cleaning.APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS 30RAP Maintenance Interval Requirements WEEKLY Compressor Cooler Condenser Check oil level. Cooler Controls Condenser Starter NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty. Ensure operation of units flow switch. Check all connections for leaks. Economizer Controls Starter QUARTERLY Compressor Cooler Condenser Check oil level Check refrigerant charge. Economizer Controls Starter MONTHLY Compressor Cooler Condenser Check oil level. Run all compressors and ensure proper operation. None. None. Review Alarm/Alert History. None. Inspect all coils and clean. Inspect sight glass for moisture and refrigerant level. None. None.Manualslib. Check refrigerant charge. Check condenser approach to determine if tubes need to be cleaned. Economizer Controls Starter ANNUALLY Compressor Check Oil Level. Economizer Verify proper operation of EXVs and TXVs Perform an Automated Controls test. None.com manuals search engine . Inspect all electrical connections and tighten as needed. None. Obtain and test an oil sample. Check for temperature drop across filter drier to determine if filter needs replacement. ________________ CHECK ALARMS / FAULTS OPERATOR INITIALS DATE OIL LEVEL REMARKS NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.Manualslib. 111 Downloaded from www.com manuals search engine .APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont) 30RAP Weekly Maintenance Log Plant ___________________________ Machine Model No. com manuals search engine 112 System NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.5 Years Cooler Condenser Annually Annually Controls Starter Annually Downloaded from www.APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont) 30RAP Monthly Maintenance Log Month Date Operator UNIT SECTION Compressor ACTION Check Oil Level Send Oil Sample Out for Analysis Leak Test Inspect and Clean Cooler Inspect Cooler Heater Leak Test Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI) Inspect Water Pumps Leak Test Inspect and Clean Condenser Coil General Cleaning and Tightening Connections Check Pressure Transducers Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors General Tightening & Cleaning Connections Inspect All Contactors Check Refrigerant Charge Verify Operation Of EXVs And Record Position Record System Super Heat UNIT yes/no yes/no ppm yes/no amps yes/no PSI yes/no ppm yes/no yes/no yes/no yes/no yes/no yes/no yes/no 0-100% deg. F 1 / / / 2 / / 3 / / 4 / / 5 / / 6 / / 7 / / 8 / / 9 / 10 / / 11 / / 12 / / ENTRY Annually Every 3 . .Manualslib. Manualslib.APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont) 30RAP Seasonal Shutdown Log Month Date Operator UNIT SECTION Cooler Controls ACTION Isolate and Drain Cooler Add Glycol for Freeze Protection Do Not Disconnect Control Power 1 / / / 2 / / 3 / / 4 / / 5 / / 6 / / 7 / / 8 / / 9 / 10 / / 11 / / 12 / / ENTRY NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty. Downloaded from www.com manuals search engine 113 . or change at any time.Manualslib.Copyright 2010 Carrier Corporation Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue.com manuals search engine . Catalog No. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U. Form 30RAP-2T Pg 114 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T Downloaded from www.S.A. specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. UNIT IS INSTALLED LEVEL AS PER THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 04-53300067-01 Printed in U. 3.START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RAP LIQUID CHILLER (Remove and use for Job File) I.com manuals search engine . Catalog No. ALL PLUG ASSEMBLIES ARE TIGHT. 4. 2. ALL PIPING IS CONNECTED PROPERLY. 3. ALL CHILLED WATER VALVES ARE OPEN.Manualslib.D. Project Information JOB NAME ______________________________________________________________________________ ADDRESS _______________________________________________________________________________ CITY ____________________________________________ STATE _______________ ZIP______________ INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ________________________________________________________________ SALES OFFICE ___________________________________________________________________________ START-UP PERFORMED BY ________________________________________________________________ Design Information CAPACITY CEAT EWT LWT FLUID TYPE FLOW RATE P. POWER SUPPLY AGREES WITH THE UNIT NAMEPLATE. ALL AIR HAS BEEN PURGED FROM THE SYSTEM. Preliminary Equipment Check IS THERE ANY PHYSICAL DAMAGE? YES NO DESCRIPTION ____________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________ 1. 2. 5. 9. UNIT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.S. ALL CABLES AND THERMISTORS HAVE BEEN INSPECTED FOR CROSSED WIRES. 6. specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Form 30RAP-2T Pg CL-1 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T Downloaded from www. 4. or change at any time. ALL THERMISTORS ARE FULLY INSERTED INTO WELLS. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION HAS BEEN SIZED AND INSTALLED PROPERLY. YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue. ELECTRICAL POWER WIRING IS INSTALLED PROPERLY. 7. 8. Chilled Water System Check 1.A. CHILLED WATER PUMP IS OPERATING WITH THE CORRECT ROTATION. ALL TERMINALS ARE TIGHT. UNIT MODEL ______________________________ SERIAL ________________________________ II. .... CONTROL TRANSFORMER PRIMARY CONNECTION SET FOR PROPER VOLTAGE. CHECK REFRIGERANT AND OIL CHARGE..) 8. 5.......Manualslib. INSULATED AND OPERATIONAL....... 11............. 4..............-. 2.. COOLER HEATERS INSTALLED AND OPERATIONAL.... 6... DEVIATION/AVERAGE VOLTAGE) X 100 VOLTAGE IMBALANCE LESS THAN 2%... YES (DO NOT START CHILLER IF VOLTAGE IMBALANCE IS GREATER THAN 2%. CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY FOR ASSISTANCE..CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE .5 N-M).... RECORD OPERATING TEMPERATURES AND PRESSURES... 7......) 9. WATER LOOP VOLUME GREATER THAN MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS...... LOCATE.... CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROLLED BY CHILLER.... REPAIR AND REPORT ANY REFRIGERANT LEAKS...... YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO Instruction Time ________ hours. (9.... YES YES YES NO NO NO NO 8. OUTDOOR PIPING WRAPPED WITH ELECTRIC HEATER TAPE.... 3... (See Table 40)..............5.........com manuals search engine .. Complete the Following: 1. RECORD COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT. COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL IS CORRECT... Unit Start-Up 1......... 4...334 m/psi COOLER FLOW RATE YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO ________ psig (kPa) ________ psig (kPa) ________ psig (kPa) ________ ft of water ________ m of water ________ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure Drop Curves from Installation Instructions) Start and Operate Machine..../psi = kPa X 0. COMPLETE COMPONENT TEST.. LEAK CHECK UNIT.. YES ANTIFREEZE TYPE _____________________ CONCENTRATION __________%...... YES NO YES YES NO NO III. 6... CHILLED WATER PUMP STARTER INTERLOCKED WITH CHILLER.... IF OUTDOOR AMBIENT IS BELOW 32 F (0° C) THEN ITEMS 9-11 HAVE TO BE COMPLETED TO PROVIDE COOLER FREEZE PROTECTION TO –20 F (–29 C)...31 ft..5-13.. CONTROL TRANSFORMER SECONDARY VOLTAGE = 7...... RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS. PROPER LOOP FREEZE PROTECTION PROVIDED TO _____ °F (°C)... 6. CL-2 Downloaded from www...... PRESSURE ENTERING COOLER PRESSURE LEAVING COOLER COOLER PRESSURE DROP Psig X 2....... CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH IS OPERATIONAL. VERIFY COMPRESSOR MOUNTING BOLT TORQUE IS 7-10 FT-LB.......... VOLTAGE IS WITHIN UNIT NAMEPLATE RANGE... (REFER TO WINTER SHUTDOWN FOR PROPER COOLER WINTERIZATION PROCEDURE.... 3. 2........ 10...... VERIFY COOLER FLOW RATE.. PROVIDE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER’S PERSONNEL...... 5. CHECK VOLTAGE IMBALANCE: A-B A-C B-C AVERAGE VOLTAGE = (A-B + A-C + B-C)/3 MAXIMUM DEVIATION FROM AVERAGE VOLTAGE = VOLTAGE IMBALANCE = ____________% (MAX.. B SCT.A RGT.B SST. CIRCUIT B DP.A SCT.OPERATING DATA: RECORD THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION FROM THE PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES MODES WHEN MACHINE IS IN A STABLE OPERATING CONDITION: PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT A DISCHARGE PRESSURE SUCTION PRESSURE SATURATED CONDENSING TEMP SATURATED SUCTION TEMP RETURN GAS TEMPERATURE LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE* DISCHARGE LINE TEMPERATURE* *Readings taken with a digital thermometer.B RGT.B DP.A COOLER EWT COOLER LWT OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL POINT PERCENT TOTAL CAPACITY LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID EWT LWT OAT CTPT CAP DLWT (Dual Chiller Control Only) Compressor Running Current — All readings taken at full load.B SP.A SP.Manualslib. COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT COMPRESSOR A1 COMPRESSOR A2 COMPRESSOR B1 COMPRESSOR B2 L1 L2 L3 CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT FAN MOTOR 1 FAN MOTOR 2 FAN MOTOR 3 FAN MOTOR 4 L1 L2 L3 COOLER PUMP MOTOR CURRENT COOLER PUMP 1 COOLER PUMP 2 L1 L2 L3 CL-3 Downloaded from www.com manuals search engine .A SST. ..........................................................._ _-_ _ CESR-131171....com manuals search engine ......_ _-_ _ CESR-131172..........._ _-_ _ CESR-131333......Manualslib.....................................-._ _-_ _ CESR-131227.........CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE ..................._ _-_ _ CESR-131174......................................._ _-_ _ (PRESS ENTER AND ESCAPE SIMULTANEOUSLY TO OBTAIN SOFTWARE VERSIONS) COMMENTS: _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________ SIGNATURES: START-UP TECHNICIAN _____________________________ DATE ___________________________________ CUSTOMER REPRESENTATIVE _____________________________ DATE ________________________________________ CL-4 Downloaded from www.Record Software Versions MODE — RUN STATUS SUB-MODE VERS ITEM MBB AUX1 EXV EMM MARQUEE NAVIGATOR DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION CESR-131460........ S D.III.S PM.2 SZA.SP FAN.DY PM.G.com manuals search engine .T MOPS APPR COOLER FLUID MINIMUM LOAD VALVE SELECT DISCHARGE GAS TEMP ENABLE CSB BOARDS ENABLE COOLER PUMP CONTROL COOLER PUMP 1 ENABLE COOLER PUMP 2 ENABLE COOLER PMP PERIODIC STRT COOLER PUMP SELECT COOLER PUMP SHUTDOWN DLY PUMP CHANGEOVER HOURS ROTATE COOLER PUMPS NOW EMM MODULE INSTALLED CND HX TYP 0=RTPF 1=MCHX EXV MOP SET POINT CONFIG APPROACH SETPOINT X YES/NO ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL ON/OFF YES/NO YES/NO YES/NO X XX MIN XXXX HRS YES/NO YES/NO 0/1 XX XX DISPLAY ENTRY CL-5 Downloaded from www. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW: OPTIONS1 (Options Configuration) SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION UNIT OPTIONS 1 HARDWARE FLUD MLV.4 SH.SL PM. PRESS ENTER KEY.TY MAX.1 UNIT SZB.Manualslib.P EMM CND.P. Unit Start-Up (cont) RECORD CONFIGURATION SETTINGS UNIT (Configuration Settings) SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION UNIT CONFIGURATION SIZE SZA.2 SZB.4 SZB.S EXV A1.3 SZB.1 SZA.E CPC PM1E PM2E OPT1 PM.3 SZA.X F X YES/NO YES/NO XX DISPLAY ENTRY PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘UNIT’.T UNIT SIZE COMPRESSOR A1 SIZE COMPRESSOR A2 SIZE COMPRESSOR A3 SIZE COMPRESSOR A4 SIZE COMPRESSOR B1 SIZE COMPRESSOR B2 SIZE COMPRESSOR B3 SIZE COMPRESSOR B4 SIZE SUPERHEAT SETPOINT FAN STAGING SELECT EXV MODULE INSTALLED COMPRESSOR A1 DIGITAL? MAXIMUM A1 UNLOAD TIME XXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX.EN CSB.DT ROT. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT1’. ... RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW........................... PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP... Delta Configuration) SUB-MODE HP....... PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.DT A2.ST LS...Manualslib........ Unit Start-Up (cont) PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT1’........ PRESS ENTER KEY....LT CTRL CCNA CCNB CONTROL METHOD LOADING SEQUENCE SELECT LEAD/LAG CIRCUIT SELECT HIGH LCW ALERT LIMIT MINUTES OFF TIME ICE MODE ENABLE CLOSE CONTROL SELECT LOW SOUND MODE SELECT LOW SOUND START TIME LOW SOUND END TIME LOW SOUND CAPACITY LIMIT CONTROL METHOD CCN ADDRESS CCN BUS NUMBER X X X XX...III... RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.DT ITEM EXPANSION SCT DELTA FOR COMP A1 SCT DELTA FOR COMP A2 DISPLAY XX XX ENTRY PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP............ RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.com manuals search engine ..........X F XX ENBL/DSBL ENBL/DSBL X 00:00 00:00 XXX % X XXX XXX DISPLAY ENTRY PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT2’.......... HP...... CCN (CCN Network Configuration) SUB-MODE ITEM CCNA CCN CCNB BAUD ITEM EXPANSION CCN ADDRESS CCN BUS NUMBER CCN BAUD RATE DISPLAY XXX XXX X ENTRY PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘CCN’. OPTIONS2 (Options Configuration) SUBMODE ITEM ITEM EXPANSION UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS CTRL LOAD LLCS LCWT DELY ICE..M OPT2 CLS..CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE .A (Head Pressure Cmp.... PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘OPT2’. HP... PRESS ENTER KEY............. PRESS ENTER KEY......A’. PRESS ENTER KEY......DT B2...B (Head Pressure Cmp...A’....-...C LS..........DT ITEM EXPANSION SCT DELTA FOR COMP B1 SCT DELTA FOR COMP B2 DISPLAY XX XX ENTRY CL-6 Downloaded from www......ND LS. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘CCN’......B ITEM B1...A ITEM A1............. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW..B’..MD LS..................... Delta Configuration) SUB-MODE HP... B ITEM EXPANSION EXV CIRC. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.B MAX. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW. EXV.S P. Unit Start-Up (cont) PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘HP.B’.A’.Manualslib. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.GAN MIN.FAN SUB PRE-CLOSE EXV .A MAX.A POF.B RNG.S ITEM EXPANSION MOTORMASTER SELECT HEAD PRESSURE P GAIN HEAD PRESSURE I GAIN HEAD PRESSURE D GAIN MINIMUM FAN SPEED DISPLAY YES/NO XX XX.A MIN POSITION EXVA STEPS IN RANGE EXVA STEPS PER SECOND EXVA FAIL POSITION IN % EXVA MINIMUM STEPS EXVA MAXIMUM STEPS EXVA OVERRUN STEPS EXVA STEPPER TYPE HIGH SCT THRESHOLD OPEN EXV X% ON 2ND COMP MOVE EXV X% ON DISCRSOL PRE-OPEN EXV .A START POS EXV CIRC. MM (Motormaster Configuration Settings) SUB-MODE ITEM MMR.B MIN POSITION EXVB STEPS IN RANGE EXVB STEPS PER SECOND EXVB FAIL POSITION IN % EXVB MINIMUM STEPS EXVB MAXIMUM STEPS EXVB OVERRUN STEPS EXVB STEPPER TYPE DISPLAY XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX 0. EXV. PRESS ENTER KEY.A MIN. PRESS ENTER KEY.B EXV.B’.B OVR.FAN ADDING PRE-CLOSE EXV .1 ENTRY PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV.SCT X.B (Circuit B EXV Configuration) SUB-MODE ITEM STR.III.B MIN. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.A RNG.1 XXX XX XX XXX XXX XXX XXX ENTRY PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘EXV. PRESS ENTER KEY.A’. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW.A TYP. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘MM’.PER A.B’.GAN MM I.B POF.PCT S.A SPD.X XX.A EXV.A OVR.A MIN.PCT X.PCT DELY ITEM EXPANSION EXV CIRC.com manuals search engine .A H.PCT M.LAG SHUT LAG START DELAY DISPLAY XXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXX 0.B MIN.B START POS EXV CIRC.A (Circuit A EXV Configuration) SUB-MODE ITEM STR.GAN D.B SPD.X XX ENTRY CL-7 Downloaded from www.AB TYP. CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE ...........X °F XX........X °F XXX.. PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘RSET’....X °F XX....DG RT.. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW: SLCT (Setpoint and Ramp Load Configuration) SUBMODE SLCT CLSP RL..NO RESET TEMP REMOTE ........ RSET (Reset Configuration Settings) SUBMODE RSET CRST MA........GN ITEM ITEM EXPANSION SETPOINT AND RAMP LOAD COOLING SETPOINT SELECT RAMP LOAD SELECT COOLING RAMP LOADING SCHEDULE NUMBER DEADBAND MULTIPLIER X ENBL/DSBL X.........DG DMDC DM20 SHNM SHDL SHTM DLS1 DLS2 LLEN MSSL SLVA LLBL LLBD LLDY PARA ITEM ITEM EXPANSION RESET COOL TEMP COOLING RESET TYPE 4-20 .......... PRESS ENTER KEY........... PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘SLCT’.....NO RM..com manuals search engine ..DEGREES RESET DEMAND LIMIT SELECT DEMAND LIMIT AT 20 MA LOADSHED GROUP NUMBER LOADSHED DEMAND DELTA MAXIMUM LOADSHED TIME DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 1 DEMAND LIMIT SWITCH 2 LEAD/LAG CHILLER ENABLE MASTER/SLAVE SELECT SLAVE ADDRESS LEAD/LAG BALANCE SELECT LEAD/LAG BALANCE DELTA LAG START DELAY PARALLEL CONFIGURATION X XX.........III..NO RESET TEMP RETURN ...DG RM.....FULL RESET TEMP REMOTE ..-.....X °F XXX.............Manualslib..........X °F X XXX % XXX XXX % XXX XXX % XXX % ENBL/DSBL SLVE/MAST XXX X XXX XXX YES/NO DISPLAY ENTRY PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘RSET’.....X XX X................DEGREES RESET RETURN ..DEGREES RESET REMOTE ..............F RM.........X °F XXX...... PRESS ENTER KEY.........F RT.NO RT......X °F XXX...S CRMP SCHD Z......FULL RESET TEMP RETURN ... Unit Start-Up (cont) PRESS ESCAPE KEY TO DISPLAY ‘MM’.X DISPLAY ENTRY CL-8 Downloaded from www... RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW...... ON F.X °F DISPLAY ENTRY CL-9 Downloaded from www.X °F XX.X °F XXX. Unit Start-Up (cont) PRESS ESCAPE KEY SEVERAL TIMES TO GET TO THE MODE LEVEL (BLANK DISPLAY).III. RECORD CONFIGURATION INFORMATION BELOW: SETPOINT SUBMODE COOL CSP.X °F XXX.3 ITEM ITEM EXPANSION COOLING SETPOINTS COOLING SETPOINT 1 COOLING SETPOINT 2 ICE SETPOINT HEAD PRESSURE SETPOINTS H.1 CSP.Manualslib.OFF B.DLT FRZ HEAD SET POINT FAN ON SET POINT FAN OFF SET POINT BASE FAN OFF DELTA TEMP FAN STAGE DELTA BRINE FREEZE SETPOINT BR.2 CSP.FZ BRINE FREEZE POINT XXX. USE THE ARROW KEYS TO SCROLL TO THE SET POINT LED.X °F XXX. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY SETPOINTS.X °F XXX.X °F XXX.OFF F.com manuals search engine .DP HEAD F.X °F XXX.X °F XX. .A... ‘PASS’ AND ‘WORD’ WILL FLASH IF PASSWORD NEEDS TO BE ENTERED..A3 CC.......... PRESS ESCAPE AND DISPLAY NOW SAYS ‘TEST’ ‘ON’.. REFER TO THE TABLE BELOW...... PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY AT ‘OFF’ AND ENTER AGAIN SO ‘OFF’ FLASHES... PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY PASSWORD FIELD AND USE THE ENTER KEY FOR EACH OF THE FOUR PASSWORD DIGITS. Condenser fan contactor 1 Condenser fan contactor 2 Condenser fan contactor 3 Condenser fan contactor 4 Condenser fan contactor 5 Condenser fan contactor 6 Completed (Yes/No) TEST OUTPUTS AND PUMPS ENTER FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 FAN4 FAN5 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF XXX% XXX% ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF FAN 1 RELAY FAN 2 RELAY FAN 3 RELAY FAN 4 RELAY FAN 5 RELAY FAN 6 RELAY VAR HEAD PRESS % VAR HEAD PRESS % OUTS FAN6 V...............A4 MLV ENTER CC.... Service Test Mode and Sub-Mode Directory SUB-MODE KEYPAD ENTRY ENTER ITEM DISPLAY ON/OFF ITEM EXPANSION SERVICE TEST MODE COMMENT To Enable Service Test Mode..HT RMT.... move Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to OFF....B2 CC... Form 30RAP-2T Pg CL-10 12-10 Replaces: 30RAP-1T Downloaded from www... Move switch to ENABLE.... PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY AND ENTER TO ENABLE THE MANUAL MODE.... or change at any time.......III. PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY ‘DISP’.TM ON/OFF 0 to 15 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF COMPRESSOR A1 RELAY COMP A1 UnLOAD TIME COMPRESSOR A2 RELAY COMPRESSOR A3 RELAY COMPRESSOR A4 RELAY MINIMUM LOAD VALVE RELAY CIRCUIT B COMPRESSOR TEST CMPA CC.. Change TEST to ON.........Manualslib...... Copyright 2010 Carrier Corporation Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue...2 CL. except the ability to configure circuit B will be displayed.. PRESS ESCAPE TO RETURN TO THE ‘DISP’ DISPLAY...CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE . PRESS ENTER TO DISPLAY ‘TEST’.HPA V...com manuals search engine . PRESS THE ESCAPE KEY AGAIN AND USE THE ARROW KEYS TO ILLUMINATE THE SERVICE TEST LED.............A COOLER PUMP 1 RELAY COOLER PUMP 2 RELAY COOLER/PUMP HEATER REMOTE ALARM RELAY CIRCUIT A COMPRESSOR TEST ENTER CC..S..1 CLP.......... 04-53300067-01 Printed in U.......B4 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF COMPRESSOR B1 RELAY COMPRESSOR B2 RELAY COMPRESSOR B3 RELAY COMPRESSOR B4 RELAY See Note See Note See Note See Note CMPB NOTE: If the unit has a single circuit.. PRESS ENTER TO STOP DISPLAY AT ‘OFF’ AND ENTER AGAIN SO ‘OFF’ DISPLAY FLASHES...-........... ALL LED SEGMENTS AND MODE LEDS WILL LIGHT UP......A1 UL..... PRESS ENTER AGAIN TO DISPLAY ‘TEST’ FOLLOWED BY ‘OFF’.. PRESS ESCAPE TO STOP THE TEST.B1 CC.. specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations......... Catalog No.......... PRESS THE UP ARROW KEY TO DISPLAY ‘ON’ AND PRESS ENTER..... the Circuit B items will not appear in the display..B3 CC.... Unit Start-Up (cont) COMPONENT TEST USE ESCAPE/ARROW KEYS TO ILLUMINATE CONFIGURATION LED.. AT FLASHING ‘OFF’ DISPLAY...... USE ARROW KEYS IF PASSWORD IS OTHER THAN STANDARD.............A2 CC....HPB CLP.........
Report "Aquasnap Air Cooled Chillers With Comfortlink Controls 30rap010060"